Study Guide Bachelor’s programme in International Communication and Media
2013-2014
1
Contents 1 Foreword 5 2 Organization of the study programme 7 2.1 Professional profile .................................................................................................... 7 2.1.1 Profession ........................................................................................................... 7 2.1.2 Details of professional profile .............................................................................. 7 2.1.3 Competencies of a beginning professional practitioner ...................................... 8 2.1.4 Graduate skills .................................................................................................... 11 2.1.5 Field of work and employment functions ............................................................. 12 2.2 Profile of study programme........................................................................................ 12 2.2.1 General ............................................................................................................... 12 2.2.2 Study programme objective ................................................................................ 12 2.2.3 The HBO (‘Higher Vocational Education’) level of the study programme ............ 12 2.2.4 Teaching: principles ............................................................................................ 13 2.3 Organization of the study programme ....................................................................... 13 2.3.1 Programme tracks .............................................................................................. 13 2.3.2 Abridged and accelerated study programme routes ........................................... 13 2.3.3 Certificates .......................................................................................................... 13 2.3.4 Degrees and titles ............................................................................................... 14 2.3.5 Structure of the study programme ...................................................................... 14 2.4 Preliminary year......................................................................................................... 15 2.4.1 Programme ......................................................................................................... 16 2.4.2 Advice concerning study progress ...................................................................... 16 2.4.3 Switching to another programme ........................................................................ 18 2.5 Main stage ................................................................................................................. 18 2.5.1 Admission to main stage ..................................................................................... 19 2.5.2 Programmes ....................................................................................................... 19 2.5.3 Internships and value of internships ................................................................... 23 2.5.4 Optional subjects component.............................................................................. 23 2.5.5 Excellence .......................................................................................................... 24 2.5.6 Graduating .......................................................................................................... 25 2.5.7 Follow-up options................................................................................................ 25 2.6 Board of Examiners ................................................................................................... 25 2.6.1 Establishment and appointments ........................................................................ 25 2.6.2 Composition ........................................................................................................ 25 2.6.3 Powers and responsibilities ................................................................................ 26 2.6.4 Petitions .............................................................................................................. 26 2.7 Introduction and supervision days, excursions, working weeks, and training courses 27 2.8 Facilities .................................................................................................................... 27 2.8.1 Supervision ......................................................................................................... 27 2.8.2 IT facilities ........................................................................................................... 27 2.8.2.1 General ........................................................................................................... 27 2.8.2.2 Student mail .................................................................................................... 28 2.8.2.3 SharePoint ...................................................................................................... 28 2.8.2.4 OSIRIS Student............................................................................................... 28 2.8.2.5 Password ........................................................................................................ 30 2.8.2.6 Information security and privacy ...................................................................... 30 2.8.2.7 Recording your study progress ....................................................................... 30 2.8.3 Education desk ................................................................................................... 30 2.8.4 Study association................................................................................................ 31 2.8.5 Programme committees ...................................................................................... 31 2.9 Contact details ........................................................................................................... 31 3 Courses 32 3.1 Course participation................................................................................................... 32 3.2 Enrolling for courses .................................................................................................. 32 3.3 Obligation to attend ................................................................................................... 32 3.4 Entry requirements .................................................................................................... 32 3.5 Course descriptions ................................................................................................... 32 4 Exams 33 4.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................ 33 4.2 Exemptions ................................................................................................................ 33 2
4.3 Organization of exams ............................................................................................... 34 4.3.1 Duration and form of exams................................................................................ 34 4.3.2 Exam timetable ................................................................................................... 35 4.3.3 Enrolling for and taking exams (including retakes) ............................................. 35 4.3.4 Facilities for those with functional limitations ...................................................... 36 4.3.5 Proof of identity required for written exams ........................................................ 37 4.3.6 Procedures during exams ................................................................................... 38 4.4 Assessment ............................................................................................................... 38 4.4.1 Assigning the marks; viewing the exam .............................................................. 38 4.4.2 Irregularities / fraud ............................................................................................. 40 4.4.3 Keeping and returning exams ............................................................................. 40 4.4.4 Validity of results................................................................................................. 41 5 Certification 42 5.1 Procedure for awarding certificates ........................................................................... 42 5.2 ‘Cum laude’ or ‘met genoegen’ (with merit) ............................................................... 42 6 Timetables 44 6.1 Annual timetable ........................................................................................................ 44 6.2 Holidays and free days .............................................................................................. 46 6.3 Days and times of lessons ......................................................................................... 46 6.4 Opening hours of buildings ........................................................................................ 46 6.5 Timetable information and alterations ........................................................................ 47 7 Complaints, objections, appeals 48 7.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................ 48 7.2 Objections.................................................................................................................. 48 7.3 Appeals ..................................................................................................................... 49 7.3.1 Lodging an appeal .............................................................................................. 49 7.3.2 Further appeals................................................................................................... 50 7.4 Complaints................................................................................................................. 50 7.4.1 Submitting a complaint ....................................................................................... 50 7.4.2 Requesting a review of how a complaint has been dealt with ............................. 50 7.5 Undesirable behaviour............................................................................................... 50 8 Student Affairs 52 8.1 Student support and guidance ................................................................................... 52 8.2 Talent Grant............................................................................................................... 52 8.3 Student counsellor ..................................................................................................... 53 8.4 Confidential counsellor .............................................................................................. 54 8.5 Students’ doctor......................................................................................................... 54 8.6 Student Psychologist Office ....................................................................................... 54 8.7 Mediation ................................................................................................................... 55 8.8 Studying with a functional limitation ........................................................................... 55 8.9 Improving your language and writing skills ................................................................ 56 8.10 Media centre .............................................................................................................. 56 8.11 International Office .................................................................................................... 56 8.11.1 Study abroad ................................................................................................... 56 8.11.2 Internship abroad ............................................................................................ 56 8.12 Student participation .................................................................................................. 57 8.12.1 Consultation bodies ......................................................................................... 57 8.12.2 Support for students who are involved with administrative duties ................... 57 8.13 Studium Generale...................................................................................................... 58 8.14 Student association ................................................................................................... 58 8.14.1 General ........................................................................................................... 58 8.14.2 Administrative grant ........................................................................................ 58 8.15 Top-level sport ........................................................................................................... 59 8.16 Trajectum................................................................................................................... 59 8.17 Sports ........................................................................................................................ 59 8.18 Safe, healthy, and environmentally-friendly study ..................................................... 59 8.19 Insurance cover: liability, accident, and travel ........................................................... 61 8.20 Having a job while studying ....................................................................................... 61 8.21 Accommodation ......................................................................................................... 62 9 About the HU 63 9.1 General information ................................................................................................... 63 9.1.1 Education profile of the HU ................................................................................. 63 3
9.1.2 Bachelor’s and Master’s system ......................................................................... 64 9.1.3 HU and faculty regulations .................................................................................. 64 9.1.4 Rules governing order ........................................................................................ 65 9.1.5 Quality assurance ............................................................................................... 66 9.1.6 HU organizational chart ...................................................................................... 66 9.1.7 HU locations ....................................................................................................... 67 9.2 General information on the faculty of Communication and Journalism ...................... 67 9.2.1 General ............................................................................................................... 67 9.2.2 Organizational chart of the faculty ...................................................................... 67 9.2.3 Contact information ............................................................................................. 67 9.2.4 Map ..................................................................................................................... 67 9.2.5 Practical provisions and instructions ................................................................... 68 9.2.6 Facilities .............................................................................................................. 68 9.2.7 Enrolment for and unenrolling from the study programme .................................. 69 9.2.8 Admission test .................................................................................................... 70 9.2.9 Study costs, supplementary fees, and rebates ................................................... 71 9.2.9.1 Tuition fees...................................................................................................... 71 9.2.9.2 Costs of books and learning materials ............................................................ 73 9.2.9.3 Other costs ...................................................................................................... 73 9.2.9.4 Financial assistance ........................................................................................ 73 10 Course descriptions 74 11. Appendices 190 11.1. Teaching and Examination Regulations
4
1
Foreword
Dear Student, Welcome to the 2013-2014 Study Guide for the ICM programme. We hope you will have an enjoyable and successful time as a student of our programme. This Study Guide contains important information and guidelines that can help you do just that. The HU University of Applied Sciences Utrecht provides demand-driven and competency-based teaching. Competency-based means that you will possess all the competencies you need when embarking on your professional career (see Section 2.11.). Demand-driven means we aim to structure teaching and the related support activities so that you can develop during your time as a student in the way that you prefer and which best suits your needs. Below you will find information about the most important aspects of your course and the choices available to you. Influence of the students Many of the choices we offer have been devised or improved as a result of initiatives by your fellow students. The HU (University of Applied Sciences Utrecht) regards you as a partner – you are part of our knowledge community, so we greatly value your ideas and opinions. Your first opportunity to air your views is in the evaluations of every module, in which you can give your assessment and tips for improvements. We also organize dialogue sessions for each programme and in each faculty, in which we discuss your study programme and all the aspects related to it. The HU supports the active participation of students on Programme Committees and participatory bodies (8.12). Every year, we ask you to fill in the NSE (National Student Survey). And if there is a lecturer who has particularly impressed you, you can nominate him or her as the lecturer of the year! And there is also an election for student of the year; in 2012-2013 an ICM student was in the finals of this election and we are very happy about that! Excellence The HU acknowledges different types of excellence. If you get excellent results in your exams, your diploma may bear the words ‘cum laude’ or ‘met genoegen’ (‘with merit’) (5.2). However, you can also shine in other areas, like innovation and leadership, something the HU is keen to promote, and the SIRIUS programme has been developed for that purpose. You can collect ‘stars’, and if you are really outstanding, will be awarded the official designation of ‘Excellent Student’ (2.5.5.). In breadth, in depth Many study programmes have specializations, in which you can work on a particular part of your field in depth. In addition, most programmes have an optional subjects component (worth 30 ECs; six months) that you can use to specialize in your own field or to learn about an entirely different field. This could be in your own faculty or at a different faculty; often, it is even possible to do a course at another educational establishment entirely (2.5.4). You can also put together your own exam programme – your study progress advisor (2.8.1) can help you with this. Permission for this is required from the Board of Examiners of your study programme (2.6). There is also the ‘Studium Generale’ (the scientific discussion platform), which runs inspiring programmes. What else? You can also use your time as a student to broaden your mind, and to gain experience outside your regular studies. Examples that come to mind are studying abroad (8.11), or perhaps taking an active part in running your student association, social organization or students’ sports club? (8.14, 8.17) We have already mentioned participatory bodies and Programme Committees. If you are a leading practitioner of your sport, you could combine your sporting activities with a study programme (8.15). As you see, there is a huge range of options that the HU actively supports. Falling behind in your studies You may find that your studies are not progressing as you had hoped, for all kinds of reasons. If this happens because of something that is beyond your control, such as illness or problems in a relationship, there are various ways of getting help. If you miss an exam because of your personal situation, you can request an extra resit (4.3.3). If you have not obtained enough study credits and are facing the possibility of being given a negative (binding) recommendation on continuing your studies, then you will be given help with a revised study schedule, which has to be taken into account by the Board of Examiners (2.4.2). And if you had a student grant in the past, and are still studying as a result of these circumstances beyond the period of your grant entitlement, then there is the possibility of receiving financial support (8.) In all these cases, you should report your situation as soon as possible to your study progress advisor / study coach (2.8.1) or your student counsellor (8.3)! If you take too long with your studies, you could become a ‘long-term student’. To prevent this, study programmes sometimes provide extra catch-up courses. These are announced via SharePoint.
1
The numbers refer to the various Sections in the Study Guide 5
And if you have a functional limitation, it may be that you need a longer time to complete your programme, but that is by no means always necessary. The HU has a wide range of facilities that can be useful to you in your studies (8.8). Problems and complaints Do you have any problems that are having a negative impact on your studies? Or questions because you don’t know where exactly to get assistance? See your study progress advisor / study coach (2.8.1) or a student counsellor (8.3): they can give you advice or refer you to the appropriate person or department. If you have any complaints about your treatment by another student or employee, you can also speak to a confidential counsellor (8.4). For example, if people have problems working alongside others in your project group, involving our student mediators at an early stage can often prevent matters escalating and restore harmony to the group (8.7). In the event that something at the HU is not right or you disagree with a decision, every faculty and study programme has its own ‘complaints desk’ where you can lodge objections or submit complaints (7.1). What does the HU expect of you? We aim to provide you with a study programme and a study climate that enable you to develop as much as possible. We do not want to see this undermined by students committing acts of unacceptable behaviour (such as harassment, sending hate mails, verbal abuse or physical violence), so you are expected to adhere to our internal rules (9.1.4) To receive a diploma, it has to be genuinely earned. Fraud (4.4.2) is not tolerated. In particular, if it means that innocent students are affected because exam results are declared invalid, the penalties are severe. Both unacceptable behaviour and fraud may lead to the perpetrators being expelled from the study programme. As you see, there are plenty of opportunities to enjoy life as a student at the HU, most of which you will find in this Study Guide. Read it carefully, before you start your study programme. The table of contents can be used to locate any given item, but if you are still not clear or cannot find what you are looking for, look at SharePoint or ask your study progress advisor or at the education desk (2.8.3). We hope you enjoy your time as a student and wish you the best of luck in the coming academic year. On behalf of all my colleagues who contribute towards your study programme,
Carola Hageman Director Institute of Communication
6
2
Organization of the study programme
2.1
Professional profile 2.1.1
Profession
The programme International Communication and Media runs ahead of the convergence of the two classic fields, those of communication and journalism. It does not offer a 'classical' programme in communication nor a traditional programme in journalism. It produces professionals who possess the theoretical and practical knowledge of both disciplines, know how to move in the fields in between and are capable to guide both communicative and journalistic processes.
2.1.2
Details of professional profile
Below you will find details about the professional profile based on the three core words: International, Communication and Media. International More and more organizations work within an international context. This does not make the field of operation any easier, the more so since the so called globalization is only one tendency. Another tendency is the exact opposite: regionalization. This tendency also seems to become more important, maybe exactly because of globalization. Furthermore, more and more subcultures emerge - because of the arrival of the Internet -, which transcend borders, such as 'Web cultures' or 'Virtual cultures'. To survey the one as well as the other requires quite a lot from professionals: they have to possess knowledge of other cultures besides their own, they have to possess insight in international relations, they have to be able to lead projects within an international context and meanwhile have to know what their position is, what their own culture is and how this culture meshes the best with the culture of the other. In short, international thinking is one of the pillars of International Communication & Media. Communication Organizations are forced more and more by the outside world to show more openness and to do business in a socially responsible way. As a consequence the role of communication advisor has changed: he/she has to play a more active role in the strategy. This requires advisors who can look at the organization in an independent and critical way. Furthermore the amount of information to, of and within an organization has increased and has also a higher rate of circulation. A communication advisor has to be able to analyze and weigh this stream of information and after that report about this and that. This and similar developments demand a different kind of communication advisor, both specialists and all-rounders. The latter have to be able to integrate and tune in. The former can already specialize themselves within the programme but are especially advised to look for their own „corner‟ within and after the training. A modern Communication programme has to offer both room for specialization and integration. Media Besides the developments in the, if you may call it so, strategic field there are also a lot of developments in the technical and executive field. Also in that sense communication in the broadest sense of the concept has become more complicated and existing. Thus digitalisation processes in society require a better integration between different media and better strategies to reach the target group. Digitalizing and Internet have extended the communication possibilities enormously. It is definitely not the case, as is always feared with the rise of a new medium, that existing media are pushed away. Not in the least: radio, TV, photography and the written word all still exist. At the moment these imstrument areeven used more than ever before. Actually the 6 ©
Hogeschool Utrecht, September 2013
7
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Study guide for ICM programme 2012-2013
Internet, the most important medium of media, is an addition just as photography, radio and TV were „added‟. Still there is one fundamental difference, namely that Internet and digitalization combine the existing media. Nobody knows exactly what this will mean in the long run. But all tendencies point to the fact that a magazine or a video, a company film and a brochure are no longer made „by themselves‟ and more often will be part of a 'package' in which a variety of media is used. After all each medium has its advantages and disadvantages. For a certain occasion one medium is more suitable than the other. Specialists in all fields are needed. But above all people are needed who possess knowledge of the different media and are capable to link them. It is those people the International Communication & Media programme is aiming at. With this the programme does not only bank on the future but also offers something new within the existing number of programmes.
2.1.3
Competencies of a beginning professional practitioner
Starting point of the programme International Communication and Media are 10 core competencies the graduate of ICM should possess. The competencies should always meet the following quality requirements: • • • • • • •
Meets style and form requirements of the product written in correct and attractive English aimed at the target group and goal sources are reliable and up-to-date references are done by the international standards the choices made are explained made correct use of ICT-facilities
Competence 1 Systematically detect, investigate, interpret and weigh relevant signals within the society in general or the environment of an organisation in particular. The communication- and media specialist spots developments in the society and/or the environment of an organisation. He judges the relevance of the detected international trends and issues and uses them either by bringing them in the process of strategic policy making or for (journalistic) products. Competence 2 Design, conduct, analyze and report an applied research based on a communication problem. In order to formulate a communication strategy and planning or to develop a sound journalistic product, it is necessary to do research. E.g. you will have to know what is in the mind of the public and target groups. This way you can make well founded choices. During and after a communication campaign or action you need to conduct research in order to find out whether your strategy and planning have reached the intended effects. Competence 3
Translate the organizational policies into communication policies
Formulate a communication policy that will help obtain the organisational goals and strategy in the best possible way. This can be both on strategic and operational level. Competence 4 Write a tactical communication plan within the overall communication policy The organisational policy is clear and translated in common starting points for communication. These starting points are the foundation for the communication plans on a tactical level, both on internal and 8/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014 external communication questions. Competence 5
Design a media strategy
Based on profound knowledge of the media the media specialist has to make strategic decisions about the usage of various media at a given moment. Competence 6
The realization of a communication project in an international setting
Communication activities are often conducted in the form of a project or event. The project leader is responsible for the planning, briefing and realisation of the activities and the evaluation. He is able to work with suppliers from different countries and manage projects from a distance. Competence 7
The realization of communication tools in design and content
The communication officer is responsible for the realization of the communication tools that are described in the various communication plans. He will either have to brief an external party for the production or will have to execute the production himself. Competence 8
Representing the organization
The communication officer is able to act as an ambassador of the organisation within an international environment. He is able to communicate important issues to the target groups and representatives of various organisations. Competence 9
Works in an international environment
The communication- and media specialist is able to work in an international environment. He is aware of the cultural backgrounds of and the physical distance between his suppliers, his target groups and possibly colleagues. Competence 10 Professional attitude and behaviour The communication- and media professional should be able to communicate and interact in various situations and should keep in mind the context, the needs, demands and culture of his environment. He should be able to reflect on the profession in general and his personal behaviour and attitude in particular.
9/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Competencies matrix ICM Role
Work process Research
Producer
Executive Operational level
Researches and conducts communication analysis from an intercultural and international perspective SWOT Trend analysis Competitive analysis Media use analysis Target group analysis Corporate identity analysis Corporate image and identity analysis)
Design Produces briefing Presents pitch Makes prototype and/or dummy Moodboard
Create Creates content and design for internal and external print media, audiovisual media, cross media, taking into account intercultural and international perspective Corresponds and converses in English and one non-native language and can digest and interpret texts in these languages
Implement Implements means of communication, taking into account the preconditions in an intercultural and international context
Evaluate Executes product or effect evaluation in an international and intercultural context
(Pre)tests means of communication Executes (part of a) media strategy
A 1/ 2/9/10 Competencies Advisor
Composes research plan
Inventive Strategic level
Interprets and concludes based on research
Competencies
B 1/ 2/9/10
C 4/9/10
E 5/8/9/10
G 6/8/9/10
I 7/8/9/10
Reports (cross-)media concept
Translates concept into and advises on communication and media strategy (campaign and plan)
Develops implementation plan
Composes evaluation plan for product-, processand/or effect evaluation
F 3/5/8/9/10
H 6/9/10
D 3/ 4/9/10
Controls media policy
J 7/9/10
10/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2.1.4
Graduate skills
To function as intermediary between strategists and executives in both the field of communication and journalism the graduate ICM has to possess the following skills and knowledge. Knowledge of communication and media Knowledge of the professional practice Knowledge of communicative processes Knowledge of the field of media Knowledge of related disciplines Economics Business management Social-cultural studies Psychology International law Statistics ICT Professional skills Being technically able to deal with different media Being able to make simple products with different media Being able to do research via all possible sources Being able to take and process an interview Being able to translate a strategy into a plan and product(s) Practical skills Mastery of the English language Being able to construct and manage a project Mastery of a second language Being able to work in a team/editorial staff Personal skills
11/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014 Being able to present orally and in writing Being able to co-operate within an international surrounding Insight in the surroundings Knowledge of man and society Knowledge of trends and issues Reflection on strategy and ethics Being able to reflect on communication and media
This survey of skills is based on the professional profiles BVO and VVO, August 2000
2.1.5
Field of work and employment functions Strategy
Council Project management
CEO level
Translation of concept to product
Communicative expression & journalistic product
Guidance In the first instance graduates of ICM fall into the middle block and are trained for this. In theory they are the ideal intermediary between strategists and executives and will work as, for instance, counsellor, project leader, media planner or editor.
2.2
Profile of study programme 2.2.1
2.2.2
General
Study programme objective
The programme trains communication and media professionals who give content to the function of communication of an (international) organization. Graduates have insight in the process of communication within the different layers and cultures of an organization. The field of operations is broad and contains many positions varying from communication counselor to media planner. Besides the communication processes graduates can delegate in an effective way and are responsible for realizing of communication projects within an organization. A bachelor International Communication & Media possesses the competencies to practice a broad range of positions and is trained to be a broadly schooled professional in the field of internal and external communication at the government, business sector and non-profit organizations with a special focus on organizations that operate within an international surrounding.
2.2.3
The HBO (‘Higher Vocational Education’) level of the study programme
International Communication and Media trains students as professionals on bachelor‟s level in Communication and Media. Graduates are capable to advise in the fields of organizational policy, they give practical content to the policy in the field of internal and external communication and can give advice in other fields such as marketing and HRM. On the level of implementation they can shoulder the responsibility for the execution of communication activities. Although 12/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014 the students learn a number of skills that are useful with the production of means of communication, the accent is more on strategic implementation of media and bringing in specialists as (web) designers and copywriters. That is the reason why the programme is general by nature. When a graduate wants to specialize in a certain part of Communication and Media they are well prepared to participate in a master's programme. With this the programme links up with the new BAMA-structure.
2.2.4
Teaching: principles
The programme has chosen for a competency aimed educational model. A competency is the capacity of a person to execute (professional) tasks in a certain (professional) context. This capacity is disposing of a connected whole of knowledge, skills and aspects of attitude.
This means the following for the programme. The programme is aimed at the gaining of professional competencies, i.e. the gaining of connected knowledge, skills and aspects of attitude with which professional tasks can be executed. The learning is understood to be a target aimed activity of the student; the programme stimulates active and independent learning. The lecturer supports the learning process of the student and is the content expert in certain fields of competency. The learning takes place as much as possible in realistic learning environments in which learning tasks resemble professional tasks. If desirable and possible modern media (ICT) are used as much as possible. The programme is based on the concurrency-principle, at which learning moments of the programme and the professional practice influence each other positively. The learning is a social and interactive process, students work together: with each other, the lecturer and professionals from the practice. Exams are meant to determine which level of command of the competencies is reached and to offer the student insight in the progress of his/her own learning process.
2.3
Organization of the study programme 2.3.1
Programme tracks
The programme is taught in English and can only be done full-time. In the full-time programme students are expected to be available 40 hours a week. Most of the students come from secondary school or intermediate vocational education.
2.3.2
Abridged and accelerated study programme routes
International Communication and Media does not have a separate study route for short programmes. However, in individual cases students who have already passed the first year of another programme can be exempted from certain subjects and thus speed up the programme. For this, consultation with the study progress coordinator of ICM is necessary
2.3.3
Certificates
As proof that you have completed the programme (or part of it) – the preliminary year, Associate Degree (AD), or Bachelor’s – the Board of Examiners issues you with a diploma, the Dutch legal term for which is ‘getuigschrift’. The following types of diploma are awarded:
The ‘preliminary year’ diploma, for those who have successfully sat the preliminary year exam; The Bachelor’s degree diploma, for those who have successfully completed the final exam. 13/189
© Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
The diploma is signed by the chairman and a member of the Board of Examiners. A European-model International Diploma Supplement (IDS) is added to the Bachelor’s diploma. The process involves no costs. The IDS provides information on the nature and the substance of the study programme and lists the results obtained by the graduate. This makes it easier for ‘outsiders’, including those from abroad, to appreciate what the study programme and diploma entail. For each study programme, you receive just one preliminary year and one Bachelor’s diploma. See Section 5.1. for the procedure by which diplomas are issued. In principle, diplomas are in Dutch, but an English-language version can be issued on request. The International Diploma Supplement is always in English. If you have successfully completed more than one exam without gaining a degree, you can ask the Board of Examiners to issue a declaration listing the exams that you have passed. Like a diploma, the declaration is signed by the chairman and a member of the relevant Board of Examiners.
2.3.4
Degrees and titles
If you successfully complete a degree programme (Associate Degree or Bachelor’s) at the HU, you will earn a title, as well as a degree. The degree is granted by the Board of Examiners on behalf of the Executive Board. A degree confers the right to bear a title – Bachelor in the case of a Bachelor’s programme, and Associate Degree in the case of an Associate Degree programme. The subject or field in which the degree has been obtained is added to the degree title. The awarding of a Bachelor’s degree confers the right to list it after your name, abbreviated to ‘B’ (plus any additional information). Alternatively, you may use instead (so not as well as); The title ‘baccalaureus’, abbreviated to ‘bc.’, preceding your name, if it concerns any other study programme.
2.3.5
Structure of the study programme
Study stages The programme consists of two study stages, which are dealt with in detail in this chapter: the preliminary year stage, and the main stage. The programme starts with the preliminary year stage, which you finish by obtaining a preliminary year diploma. This is followed by the main stage, which lasts for three years, and is concluded with the awarding of a Bachelor’s degree. See Sections 2.4 and 2.5. Legal duration of study, study load, and study credits The study load of the programme and its related courses is expressed in study credits (ECs) in accordance with the European Credit Transfer System (ECTS), which is designed to make it easier to compare study programmes internationally. One EC corresponds with 28 hours’ of study (including contact hours). Regular Bachelor’s study programmes last four years. The composition of the programmes is based on an average study load of sixty ECs, or 1680 hours, for each year of study. The total study load of the programmes (lessons, private study, and internships) therefore amounts to 240 ECs. Study phases The course consists of two study phases: The first year phase and the principal phase. The course starts with a “propaedeutic‟ phase lasting one year. This phase ends with a first-year diploma. The principal phase follows the first-year phase and ends after three years with a bachelor’s degree. Please refer to part 4.2 and 4.3. Statutory length of study, course load, study credits The course load for each programme and the courses associated with this are expressed in study credits (ECs) according to the European Credit Transfer System (ECTS). This is a study credits system of which the purpose is to make programmes internationally comparable. A study credit of 1 EC corresponds to 28 hours of study (including contact time).
14/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
A regular bachelor’s degree takes four years. An average course load of 60 ECs or 1680 hours per academic year is taken as the starting point for each course programme. The total course load for a programme (teaching, self-study and practical time/placements) is therefore 240 ECs. Table of the distribution of course load across programme: Principal phase (180 EC.) First year (60 EC.) Major (150 EC.)
Free choice component (30 EC.)
The course load has been included in the course description and is expressed in study credits. See OSIRIS (www.osiris.hu.nl). ECs are only awarded once a particular course has been completed along with the associated exam (and/or all exam components). The first year phase The first year of the programme, the propaedeutic phase, gives an impression of the content of the study and the job you can expect later. The courses offered deal with subjects about culture, media and communication and the contents of the assignments to be fulfilled is not too complex. Furthermore, the propaedeutic phase has the function to clarify whether the programme fits the student and if the student fits the programme. Based on the number of ECTS gained the university makes a selection. The main phase The main phase comprises the second, third and fourth academic year. The major starts in the second academic year. In the third academic year, the minor and work placement take place and in the fourth year the major project. With 240 ECs (including 60 ECs of the propaedeutic phase) for all compulsory courses the student has passed the programme and receives the bachelor’s diploma.
2.4
Preliminary year
Study programmes are split into a preliminary year and a main stage for a good reason. The first year has three important functions, as designated by the government: Orientation It is very important for the sake of your studies that you take a programme that is suited to you. This means that the substance of the programme, the professional field for which you will be taught, and the way in which the programme is organized must appeal to you. One of the purposes of the preliminary year is to see whether or not this is the case. Selection At the end of your first year, it is time to review your situation. Are you doing the right programme? Is the work too difficult for you? Have you made enough progress? The answers to these questions are good pointers as to whether you will ultimately gain your diploma in the allotted time. At HU, we determine the progress students have made by giving individual advice based on assessments by those supervising the students. This involves looking at the number of ECs obtained by the student. It is very important that you are aware of the criteria for the study norm, as well as the rules relating to it. You should therefore carefully read Section 2.4.2 on Advice concerning Study Progress, so that you do not face any unpleasant surprises. Anyone who does not fulfil the study norm and who receives binding recommendations to the effect that they should not continue with the programme will not be allowed to do so. Referrals If you find that the programme is not for you, there is no need to panic. What is important is that you air your doubts in good time. It may be that your instincts are incorrect and that you do not yet have a full picture of the programme. There are amenities available that can help you if you are in doubt. You can go to the Study Choice Centre, for example, and take a study choice test. But it is important to remember that you should always contact your study progress advisor /study coach or study counsellor in case of doubt.
15/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2.4.1
Programme
In each academic year, the programme department sets the curriculum of both the study programme as a whole and its components. This study programme is valid only in the year for which it is set. The preliminary year courses are shown below, and include the number of ECs that they are worth, and the OSIRIS code. You can find a detailed overview and descriptions of the courses at the back of this Study Guide and in OSIRIS (www.osiris.hu.nl).
Depending on Schedule in Period A or B
Period
Depending on Schedule in Period C or D
Year 1: Propedeutic phase
Year
Study Program 2013 - 2014 EC Campaign plan 5 5 Designing & journalistic writing 5 Diversity and presentation 5 Media Exploration Online magazine 5 5 Understanding Audience Applied research 5 Corprate video 5 Evaluation report 5 5 Research concepts 5 Scriptwriting & video editing 5 The communicating organisation Total amount EC year 1: 60
Osiris-code JIC-CAMPL.1V-11 JIC-DEJOU.1V-13 JIC-DIPRE.1V-13 JIC-MEEXP.1V-13 JIC-ONLM.1V-11 JIC-UNAUD.1V-13 JIC-APP.1V-11 JIC-CORV.1V-11 JIC-EVA.1V-11 JIC-RECON.1V-13 JIC-SCVID.1V-13 JIC-COMO.1V-11
Courses year 1, academic year 2013-2014 latest year exams are available. Period Course Name EC Osiris-code A, B or C Crossmedial communication 5 JIC-CRSM.1V-11 A, B or C Influencing an intercultural audience 5 JIC-INFL.1V-11 A, B or C Media exploration 5 JIC-MEDEX.1V-11 A and B Research concepts 5 JIC-ANIN.1V-11 A and B Story telling 5 JIC-STOR.1V-11 A, B or C Writing and designing for media 5 JIC-WRT.1V-11
2.4.2
Advice concerning study progress
As already mentioned, you will be given advice on the progress of your study at the end of your preliminary year. In fact, during the first year of your enrolment you will receive written advice on whether or not to continue with your studies on two occasions. At the end of the first year at the latest, you will receive definitive advice. The relevant rules on this are given below. The reference date for issuing binding advice on study progress is 1 May. If you are enrolled at the HU on this date, then you will receive your binding advice at the end of your first year at the latest. If you leave the programme and have unenrolled by 1 May, then you will not receive any binding advice for that academic year. Interim study advice Halfway through the year at the latest, you will receive written interim advice on continuation of your studies from the Board of Examiners. It will also contain a detailed explanation of the results you have achieved so far and of your study progress. The interim advice could be:
16/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Positive: 20 or more study credits
Warning: 19 or fewer study credits.
If you have not made sufficient progress, then the advice you receive from the Board of Examiners will be in the form of a warning. In this case, you should contact your study progress advisor in order to draw up a study plan, to be signed by you, which you can use to get back on schedule. If you have fallen behind as a result of exceptional circumstances, you should contact the student counsellor straight away. Positive or negative study advice At the end of your first year, you will as a rule receive definitive advice on the continuation of your studies from the Board of Examiners. This will be either positive or negative. Negative advice generally means that you cannot continue with the programme at the HU. A student who has been issued with binding advice refusing continuation of study may no longer be registered for this course as a student or an external student. Neither can you be registered for the Business Communication and Digital Communication courses. The Examination Board may impose a time limit on the refusal for continuation of study, and/or decide to refuse registration to courses with the same first-year exams. You will receive a positive recommendation on the continuation of your studies if:
You have successfully completed your preliminary year, or
have obtained at least 45 ECs of the preliminary year programme.
The following elements are not included in the calculation of whether you have obtained the above total of 45 ECs: a. ECs for exemptions granted to you b. ECs obtained in a previous enrolment year. The ECs must have been obtained in the year in question. c. Results for interim exams, if the final version has not been successfully completed. If you cannot obtain 45 ECs during the preliminary year as a result of the aforementioned exceptions, you will have to successfully complete the preliminary year in full at the end of the year in order to receive a positive recommendation on the continuation of your studies. You will receive a negative recommendation (a rejection) if you have not fulfilled the criteria for a positive recommendation. Binding negative recommendations must be substantiated. Other information that must be included is referral advice and the options available to students for lodging an objection and making an appeal. Recommendations are signed by or on behalf of the Board of Examiners, and either handed to you in person or sent to you by registered post within a week of the placing of the signature. If you have received a binding negative recommendation, then you may no longer remain enrolled for the programme in question as a student or external student. The Board of Examiners will give you an opportunity for a hearing before issuing a binding negative recommendation on the continuation of your studies. If you decide to take modules in the main stage of the programme before receiving a recommendation, you should be aware that the norm for receiving a positive recommendation relates only to modules that have successfully been completed in the preliminary year part of the programme. Any ECs obtained from modules in the main stage will not count for this purpose, so you should always make a priority of successfully completing the preliminary year modules. Suspension of recommendations for students in their first enrolment year as a result of exceptional circumstances When making study recommendations, the Board of Examiners must take into account the possibility that a student has fallen behind in his or her studies due to personal circumstances. Only the following circumstances fall into this category:
Illness;
Physical, sensory or other functional disorder;
Pregnancy;
Exceptional family circumstances, including the person you live with or a person with whom you are in an LAT 17/189
© Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014 relationship;
Membership of a participatory body or programme committee;
Other circumstances in which you, as a student, are engaged in activities in the context of the organization and management of the HU, or a part of the HU, to be assessed by the faculty management;
Membership of the administration of a student organization or comparable body of a reasonable size that is recognized by the Executive Board in accordance with the HU Talent Grant scheme;
Other situations in which you have been unable to sit exams or attend lessons due to circumstances beyond your control, to be assessed by the Board of Examiners.
If the Board of Examiners considers that personal circumstances are a factor, then the recommendation on continuation of your studies will be deferred until the end of your second enrolment year at the latest. You must fulfil the norm that applies in that year for a positive recommendation at the end of your second year of study. If the recommendation on the continuation of your studies was deferred last year (or any previous year) and you are therefore due to receive a binding recommendation this year, then the norm for the current academic year will apply to you, that is, 45 ECs and any earmarked courses. Note that any ECs you obtained in previous years, and any exemptions you have been granted, will not count towards the calculations for determining how many ECs you have obtained from your preliminary year. Detailed information about the norm and what does, and what does not, count towards the calculations of the number of ECs you have obtained is given earlier in this section. A deferred recommendation is covered by the same procedure as is a regular recommendation. If you have fallen behind in your studies because of one of the exceptional circumstances listed above, you must notify the Board of Examiners in writing as soon as possible, and ask that the circumstances be taken into consideration for the purpose of your recommendation. You should also contact the student counsellor and your study progress advisor at the earliest possible opportunity. They will advise the Board of Examiners. See Section 8.3. Below is a diagrammatical overview of the norm used for binding study recommendations. Enrolment
Norm*
What does not
15 EC or more
count?
that do not count
st
st
1 year, 1 time
45 EC
Exemptions
Norm is actually P
New start after interruption
45 EC
(interruption to enrolment). 2nd year (without interruption,
Exemptions Results from earlier years
45 EC
after deferred recommendation)
Exemptions Results from earlier years
Norm is actually P Norm is actually P
*including earmarked requirements
2.4.3
Switching to another programme
If you decide to switch to a different study programme at the HU during the academic year, you will have to re-enrol completely, and gain permission from the new programme.
2.5
Main stage
The main stage is the period of study after the preliminary year, and lasts until the conferral of your degree. The main stage involves three years of study (nominally) and consists of the following:
A major (main programme) of 150 ECs; 18/189
© Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
An optional subjects component of at least 30 ECs.
2.5.1
Admission to main stage
Once you have successfully completed your preliminary year and received your diploma for that year, you will be admitted to the main stage of the study programme. If you have received a preliminary year diploma for a study programme from another institute and wish to be admitted to the main stage of a study programme at the HU on the basis of that diploma, you must submit a request to that effect to the programme. The programme will then assess whether your diploma is acceptable. If you are admitted, you will not be able to obtain a preliminary diploma from the HU. See Section 4.2 (exemptions). Students who have not rounded off the propaedeutic year can yet be allowed to take subjects of the main phase and conclude these with an exam on the condition that: · the student has received a positive study recommendation; · the student has the necessary foreknowledge to do the course (so meets the starting requirements); · no guarantee is given that the subject is still part of the curriculum or has the same content at the moment the student is officially admitted to the main phase; · if the content of the course is changed the Exam Board determines which subject content will be replaced for this.
If you decide to take modules in the main stage of the programme before receiving a recommendation as meant in Section 2.4.2, you should be aware that the norm for receiving a positive recommendation on the continuation of your studies relates only to modules that have successfully been completed in the preliminary year part of the programme. So if you decide to take modules in the main stage but do not have a sufficient number of study credits from your preliminary year at the time that the recommendation is issued, you may find yourself being given a negative recommendation. This means you will have to leave the programme, regardless of how many study credits you may have gained in the main stage.
2.5.2
Programmes
In each academic year, the programme department sets the curriculum of the main stage. This is valid only in the year for which it is set. The main stage courses are shown below, for each year of the programme, and include the number of ECs that they are worth, and the OSIRIS code. You can find complete descriptions of the courses at the back of this Study Guide and in OSIRIS.
Period Study Program 2013 - 2014 Compulsory Courses: Corporate Image Marketing Communication Project Commercial Communication Project Free Publicity Social Media and Communication Skills Change management Online Research & Professional Behaviour Project Change Communication Project Media Research Depending on Depending on Schedule Schedule in in Period A or B Period C or D
Year 2: Main phase year 1
Year
EC 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Osiris-code JIC-CORPIM.2V-12 JIC-MARCO.2V-13 JIC-PCOCO.2V-13 JIC-PFRPU.2V-13 JIC-SMCSK.2V-13 JIC-CHMAN.2V-13 JIC-ONRPB.2V-12 JIC-PCHCO.2V-13 JIC-PMERE.2V-13
19/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Understanding Intercultural Media Total Compulsory Courses: Language Courses (choice of one language): Chinese: A+B Chinese 1 C+D Chinese 2 Dutch: A+B Dutch 1 C+D Dutch 2 French: A+B French 1 C+D French 2 German: A+B German 1 C+D German 2 Spanish: A+B Spanish 1 C+D Spanish 2 Total Language Courses: Total amount EC year 2:
5 50
JIC-UNDIM.2V-12
5 5
JIC-CHI1.2V-12 JIC-CHI2.2V-12
5 5
JIC-DUT1.2V-12 JIC-DUT2.2V-12
5 5
JIC-FRE1.2V-12 JIC-FRE2.2V-12
5 5
JIC-GER1.2V-12 JIC-GER2.2V-12
5 5 10 60
JIC-SPA1.2V-12 JIC-SPA2.2V-12
Courses Main phase year 1, academic year 2013-2014 latest year exams are available. Period Course Name EC Osiris-code A and B Crossmedia Design 1 5 JIC-CMDSG1.2V-10 A and B Crossmedia Design 2 5 JIC-CMDSG2.2V-10 A and B Consumer marketing 5 JIC-CONMA.2V-12 A and B Corporate Communication 5 JIC-CORPCO.2V-08 A and B Dutch 1 5 JIC-DUT1.2V-10 A and B Dutch 2 5 JIC-DUT2.2V-10 A and B French 1 5 JIC-FRE1.2V-10 A and B French 2 5 JIC-FRE2.2V-10 A and B German 1 5 JIC-GER1.2V-10 A and B German 2 5 JIC-GER2.2V-10 A and B Internal Communication 5 JIC-INCNET.2V-07 A and B Information and Law 5 JIC-INFLAW.2V-09 A and B Intercultural and Global 5 JIC-INTGLB.2V-07 A and B Intercultural Media Research 5 JIC-INTMR.2V-12 A and B Magazine 5 JIC-MAGA.2V-07 A and B Marketing Communication 5 JIC-MARCOM.2V-07 A and B Marketing management 5 JIC-MARMAN.2V-07 A, B of C Marketing management 5 JIC-MARMAN.2V-12 A and B Media Marketing & Communication Skills 5 JIC-MMCS.2V-12 A and B Organisation Behaviour 5 JIC-ORGBE.2V-12 A and B Organisational change 5 JIC-ORGCHA.2V-12 A and B Popularization 5 JIC-POPUL.2V-07 A and B Press kit 5 JIC-PREKI.2V-12 A and B Spanish 1 5 JIC-SPA1.2V-10 A and B Spanish 2 5 JIC-SPA2.2V-10
20/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Period Year 3: Main phase year 2
Year
Year
A+B
Study Program 2013 - 2014 Minor / Foreign Exchange
A + B, B + C, C + D, D + Internship E Total amount EC year 3:
Study Program 2013 - 2014
Period
EC Osiris-code 30 30
JICINTER.3V-13
60
EC Osiris-code
Choice between Communication and media (see below) JICAPRES.3V09 JICC Me and ICM 5 MEICM.3V09 JICGraduation A, B, C, D 20 GRAAS.3VAssignment 09 Total Compulsory Courses: 30 In the fourth year of study, students can choose between Communication and Media as specialisation. Choice between: Communication: JICMedia Strategy 5 MEDSTR.3V09 JICTrends Issues and A 5 TISETH.3VEthics 11 JICCommunication 5 COCAS1.3Vcase 1 09 JICBranding 5 BRAND.3V09 JICChange B 5 CHAMAN.3VManagement 09 JICCommunication 5 COCAS2.3Vcase 2 09 Media: JICMedia Economics 5 MEDEC.3V09 JICA Media Research 5 MEDRES.3V09 JICMedia Case 1 5 MECAS1.3V09 JICB Media Literacy 5 MEDLIT.3V-
Year 4: Main phase year 3
B
Applied Research
5
21/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Media Trends
5
Media Case 2
5
09 JICMEDTRE.3V09 JICMECAS2.3V09
Total Specialisation Courses: 30 Total amount EC year 4: 60 Courses Main phase year 2, academic year 2013-2014 latest year exams are available. Period
Course Name
A, B, C, D or E A, B, C, D or E A, B, C, D or E
A, B, C, D or E
Year
EC Osiris-code JICSTAGE.3VWorkplacement 30 08 Dissertation JICDesign 2 DIDES.3V-07 JICDISERT.3VDissertation 13 07 JICDSORAL.3VDissertation Exam 2 07
Study Program 2013 - 2014
Period
EC Osiris-code
Choice between Communication and media (see below) JICAPRES.3V09 JICC Me and ICM 5 MEICM.3V09 JICGraduation A, B, C, D 20 GRAAS.3VAssignment 09 Total Compulsory Courses: 30 In the fourth year of study, students can choose between Communication and Media as specialisation. Choice between: Communication: JICMedia Strategy 5 MEDSTR.3V09 JICTrends Issues and A 5 TISETH.3VEthics 11 JICCommunication 5 COCAS1.3Vcase 1 09 JICB Branding 5 BRAND.3V09
Year 4: Main phase year 3
B
Applied Research
5
22/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Change Management
5
Communication case 2
5
Media Economics
5
Media Research
5
Media Case 1
5
Media Literacy
5
Media Trends
5
Media Case 2
5
JICCHAMAN.3V09 JICCOCAS2.3V09
Media:
A
B
JICMEDEC.3V09 JICMEDRES.3V09 JICMECAS1.3V09 JICMEDLIT.3V09 JICMEDTRE.3V09 JICMECAS2.3V09
Total Specialisation Courses: 30 Total amount EC year 4: 60
Courses Main phase year 3, academic year 2013-2014 latest year exams are available. Period
Course Name
A, B, C, D or E A, B, C, D or E
Workplacement Dissertation Design
A, B, C, D or E Dissertation A, B, C, D or E Dissertation Exam
2.5.3
EC Osiris-code JICSTAGE.3V30 08 JIC2 DIDES.3V-07 JICDISERT.3V13 07 JICDSORAL.3V2 07
Internships and value of internships
The information about work placement and guidelines for organising a work placement is to be found on Sharepoint (www.hu-sharepoint.nl) in the ICM work placement guide.
2.5.4
Optional subjects component
23/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014 In addition to the main part of the study programme (major), there is also an optional subjects component worth 30 ECs. This allows you to help ‘design’ your programme, with a focus on broadening and deepening your knowledge. The following options are available:
a minor (a cohesive package of optional courses); a pre-Master’s (a bridging component in preparation for a Master’s programme); a period of study abroad. This means you attend a college or university abroad, for two blocks; a package of optional courses that you put together yourself.
You can also use the optional subjects component to work towards outstanding achievements. The HU has a wide range of minors and individual optional subjects that have been devised jointly by all the faculties at the HU. However, you are free to choose from options provided by other colleges and universities (including abroad, see Section 8.11.1). In addition, you can use the optional subjects component to devise a package of optional courses yourself. You should consult your study progress advisor in this case. For advice and support in deciding how to use your optional subjects component, you should contact your study progress advisor (see Section 8.1.). In consultation with him/her, you draw up an optional subjects plan, setting down your choice of subjects from the HU course catalogue (‘Onderwijscatalogus’) and/or external minors or optional courses. Your optional subjects plan must demonstrate how the subjects you have chosen will contribute towards your preparations for your envisaged profession or further studies. Whatever choice you make with regard to the optional subjects component must be approved in advance by the relevant Board of Examiners. Your study progress advisor may suggest you motivate your plan, with a view to gaining the approval of the Board. The Board of Examiners may refuse to give its approval to the plan if the optional subject or minor is below HBO level, or if there is a substantial overlap between the optional course or minor and the main stage. A second external minor may also be refused. For more information about the optional subjects component and minors, go to www.minors.hu.nl. Information about studying abroad can be found at www.io.hu.nl. Note that the registration period for studying abroad opens and closes much earlier than is the case for a regular minor. The deadline is on 1 February before the academic year in which you propose to study abroad. See Section 8.10. To view the range of HU minors, optional subjects and pre-Master’s courses, and for information on enrolment, go to www.osiris.hu.nl. You can also visit the annual HU minormarkt, which is held in March and where all the HU faculties present their range of optional subjects. More information about pre-Master’s courses is available in the publication entitled, ‘Doorstuderen na je bachelor aan de UU’ and at www.premasters.hu.nl.
2.5.5
Excellence
The HU excellence programme offers you as a student the opportunity to have activities you have undertaken to be recognized as an excellent achievement. The basis of excellence is formed by the ‘stars system’. Five aspects of excellence – leadership, reflective professional and expertise; vision, motivation and passion; internationalization; innovation and dissemination – are operationalized in assessment criteria. You can demonstrate excellence in each of these aspects, which will earn you a star. In order to gain the Excellent designation in full, you must have shown excellence in more than one aspect and, in principle, have invested at least six months of your study time in it. Activities that are eligible can be suggested by both the HU and yourself. They are assessed on the basis of a fixed procedure. The Board of Examiners has the task of procedurally safeguarding the assessment policies. Information on excellence in your faculty can be found on the SharePoint site at www.Sirius.hu.nl. Procedures Achieving aspects of excellence
24/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014 1) You can take part in programme projects that lead to the awarding of one or more stars, or come up with suggestions yourself for activities or projects of your own that could be considered for stars. In the case of the latter, you should put your proposal to the relevant examiner or your study programme Excellence Committee. 2) The examiner or assessment committee will assess the proposal in accordance with the established procedure and will inform you about the outcome. 3) In the event of a positive decision, you should complete your activities, where necessary. They will be assessed by the relevant examiner or Excellence Committee in accordance with the established criteria. Achievements that are recognized as sufficiently excellent will be registered as such. Obtaining written recognition of excellence 1) If you believe you can demonstrate that you have met all the criteria for achieving recognition for ‘excellence’, you should present your achievements to an Excellence Committee. 2) In the event of achieving recognition for ‘excellence’, you will receive a written document to that effect when you graduate. You will also receive a written document for the individual stars you obtain; this will state clearly which aspects/stars are involved.
2.5.6
Graduating
Studying at the HU involves concluding your programme with a graduation exam, which you can only pass if you have met the final achievement levels of the programme. Exemptions are never granted for the graduation exam or any part of it. In other words, anyone wishing to obtain a diploma must successfully complete the graduation exam. For more information about the exam and the diploma, and for unenrolling after graduation, see Section 5.1. Digital submission and publication of theses and research articles The HU is one of the Institutes of Higher Education that is actively involved in the HBO Knowledge Base, in which publications such as theses and research articles produced in these institutes are made available in digital form to any interested party anywhere in the world. Conversely, they can also be of use for those involved in teaching and research. If you obtain a mark of 7 (out of 10) or higher for your thesis, then you may have it digitally published on the HBO Knowledge Base free of charge. One important precondition for this is that the company where you worked on your internship agrees, and that your thesis does not contain any confidential information. For more information, go to www.hbo-kennisbank.nl
2.5.7
Follow-up options
After the bachelor’s degree it is possible to do a master‟s programme at the university. Depending on the kind of master there often is a specific pre-master course. Please refer to www.uu.nl.
2.6
Board of Examiners 2.6.1
Establishment and appointments
A Board of Examiners operates for every study programme at the HU. The Board of Examiners supervises the quality of testing and is the body that issues diplomas on behalf of the Executive Board. The Boards of Examiners reach their decisions independently from the management of the study programme.
2.6.2
Composition
Members of the Examination Board are appointed by the Faculty Board. The Faculty Board will hear members already appointed to an Examination Board prior to any appointment. The Examination Board of the ICM programme will comprise at least three members, namely a chairman, deputy chairman and one or more members. 25/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2.6.3
Powers and responsibilities
The powers and responsibilities of the Board of Examiners are laid down in Chapter 4 of the HU Teaching and Examination Regulations for Bachelor’s programmes and in the HU Board of Examiners Faculty Regulations. Among the responsibilities of the Board of Examiners is to ensure that the rules relating to teaching and exams, as laid down in the HU Teaching and Examination Regulations for Bachelor’s programmes and study guides are correctly implemented. In addition, the Board safeguards the quality of the exams, gives advice with regard to policy formulation, appoints examiners, grants exemptions, gives advice on study progress, and awards diplomas. In addition to the frame of reference in the previously mentioned regulations, the Board of Examiners may also lay down rules with regard to:
Procedures during written exams (examination regulations); Invigilation during written exams (instructions to invigilators); Procedures during oral exams (examination protocol); Setting and assessing exams (examination guidelines); Imposing penalties for irregularities (fraud procedure), including declaring exam results invalid.
2.6.4
Petitions
The lecturers/examiners and the Board of Examiners implement the rules contained in the HU Teaching and Examination Regulations for Bachelor’s programmes and in the Study Guide. If you believe that a deviation from the rules should be applied in your case – an extra opportunity to sit an exam, for example, or a different exam schedule – then you may submit a petition to the Board of Examiners, but be sure to do so in time. For example, if you would like to sit an exam during a forthcoming exam period, you should remember that the Board of Examiners will require a period of three weeks in which to deal with your request. All petitions must be accompanied by the following information: a. b. c. d. e.
Your name, address, and student registration number; Date; Your request, and the reason for it; The study programme and type (full-time, part-time, dual) for which you are enrolled; Any documentary evidence.
Do not forget to sign your petition. Please note! Additional rules apply to requests for exemptions – see Section 4.2. There is a difference between a request and an objection or appeal. You should submit a request if you wish to obtain a decision from the Board of Examiners. If you do not agree with a decision of the Board of Examiners, you may lodge an objection (and appeal). This works as follows:
You submit an objection no more than two weeks (the time limit for objections) after you have received the decision of the Board of Examiners, directly to the Board of Examiners or via the legal protection office of the faculty; The general principle is that the Board of Examiners must reach a decision within two weeks of receiving the objection; If you do not agree with the decision on your objection, you have the option of appealing against it. You should do this through the HU Legal Protection for Students office. Appeals are dealt with by the Board of Appeals concerning Examinations. The period during which an appeal may be lodged is six weeks after you receive the decision on your objection from the Board of Examiners. For more information on submitting an objection or appeal, see Chapter 7 or go to www.klachtenwegwijzer.hu.nl. 26/189
© Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2.7
Introduction and supervision days, excursions, working weeks, and training courses
The excursions, work weeks, etc. referred to above are part of the programme‟s teaching programme. Consequently, participation is mandatory. Students who are prevented from participating in field trips, work weeks, training courses and supervision days due to circumstances beyond their control and/or personal circumstances (including financial difficulties) may be eligible for a substitute assignment. Requests for substitute assignments can be submitted to the Board of Examiners. The above activities form one aspect of the study programme curriculum. Participation is compulsory. Students who are unable to take part as a result of circumstances beyond their control or because of personal circumstances (including financial problems), may request financial support or be considered for an alternative assignment. You may submit a request to this effect to your faculty office. See Section 2.6.4.
2.8
Facilities 2.8.1
Supervision
As an HU student, you are entitled to advice on the progress of your studies. Many lecturers have been appointed as study progress advisors by the HU. They function as a link between you, as a student, and your study programme: you can contact them for any questions or problems you may have in relation to your studies. This could involve such matters as your study progress, or the options available to you in the curriculum. If you receive an interim negative recommendation on the continuation of your studies, your study progress advisor will help you draw up a study plan. For students doing dual programmes, there are two points of contact throughout: for the study programme, a supervising lecturer, and a company supervisor from the student’s employer. Study progress advice is the process in which you manage and learn to manage your studies and your progress. The purpose of receiving study progress advice is:
To give you an understanding of the requirements of the relevant profession; To enable you to evaluate whether you want to train towards that profession; To enable you to genuinely develop your knowledge of the practical aspects of the profession, so that you will have met the course objectives when you graduate; To enable you to make the best possible use of the time and resources available to you in order to achieve the best possible study results.
Your study progress advice will be given during face-to-face meetings with your advisor, as well as in group meetings and assignments. As your studies progress, the intensity of the advice will gradually decrease.
2.8.2 2.8.2.1
IT facilities General
The HU provides a number of standard IT facilities, which you can access using your HU user name and password. You will receive these by e-mail, shortly before you are due to start your studies, after which you will be able to log on to:
Your own e-mail address (via www.webmail.hu.nl) ; The computers at the HU. You can also use the wireless network inside the HU buildings to log on to your own laptop (Eduroam, www.eduroam.nl) ; The online catalogue of the media centre (www.catalogus.hu.nl) ; The HU intranet (www.sharepoint.hu.nl) ; 27/189
© Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Your own space for storing files (SharePoint, My Site) ; OSIRIS Student (www.osiris.hu.nl) ; A number of public sites, such as Surfspot (www.surfspot.nl). You can use this to buy hardware and software at reduced rates.
More information about the IT facilities and current developments can be found on the IT website (www.ict.hu.nl).
2.8.2.2
Student mail
Students at HU are given their own e-mail address. This is an important channel of communication for keeping you up to date with the latest information regarding your study programme; in fact, it is the only communication channel that is used for this purpose. Your mailbox can be accessed via webmail.hu.nl, using your HU user name and password. It is your responsibility to check your HU e-mails on a regular basis. You can also use your student mail to contact your fellow students and lecturers. Every e-mail address can be found in the address book, and there is also a diary, a to-do list, and a list of contact persons. In addition, you can have mail automatically sent to your private e-mail address, and of course it is possible to synchronize your mail, to-do list and contact persons with your mobile or Smartphone.
2.8.2.3
SharePoint
The HU intranet runs on SharePoint. More and more systems at HU use SharePoint for passing on their information to users. SharePoint works best with Microsoft Office, which makes it easy to work jointly on documents, presentations or spreadsheets.
Intranet The HU intranet contains information from every faculty, institute and HU service department. All information relating to education and the organization can be found here. The intranet of your study programme contains links to courses, notifications and important HU-related data, the faculty and your study programme, which lecturers are off sick, and the latest news.
Courses Many courses that are supported digitally have a site on SharePoint. The use of these sites can vary from the exchange of information – such as PowerPoint presentations by lecturers – to working in collaboration with your fellow students on projects or assignments.
MySite MySite is a personal page on SharePoint. You can use it to keep files that you can open and alter both at home and at the HU. You can also create workspaces where you can work either by yourself or with other students on projects, papers, or assignments. In addition, you can create a blog with which to share your knowledge with others.
2.8.2.4
OSIRIS Student
OSIRIS stands for ‘Onderwijs en Studenten Informatie, Registratie en Inschrijf Systeem’ (teaching and student information, records and enrolment system). The HU uses this system to record students’ progress – it contains your details, exam results, and information on which exams you have enrolled for. Every student can access OSIRIS via www.osiris.hu.nl. Once you have logged on, you can use the following basic functionalities:
View your exam results Using the ‘Resultaten’ (results) tab, you can see the marks you have gained for your last 15 exams (including interim exams), and there is a statistical overview of the average marks achieved for each exam. If you would like to view all your results in the current academic year, click on the ‘Voortgang’ (progress) tab. Under ‘Dossier’ (file), you will find an overview of all your results from throughout your time at the HU. You can choose yourself whether to
28/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014 view all your results or just those from the main stage, for example. You should check the results as soon as they are online, and report any errors within four weeks of their being uploaded to OSIRIS to the examiner whose name is listed alongside the result in question, or to the Board of Examiners.
Study progress If you would like to know which subjects you still need to do before being able to graduate, go to the ‘Voortgang’ (progress) tab. Under the ‘Studievoortgang’ (study progress) heading, select your study programme and indicate that you would like to view your ‘nog te volgen onderwijs’ (lessons still to be completed). OSIRIS will then compare your results with the curriculum, and will highlight which parts of the programme you have completed, and which you still need to do.
Applying for exemptions You can fill in an application form for exemptions under ´Studievoortgang – vrijstelling aanvragen´ (study progress – applying for an exemption). Your curriculum will then be displayed; this serves as the basis for your exemption application, to be completed on the relevant form which you can then print off. More information about granting exemptions can be found in Section 4.2.
Exam and course information Information about exams/tests, courses, minors and optional courses, and on how to enrol, can be found in OSIRIS.
Enrolling for courses and exams Using the ‘Inschrijven’ (enrolment) tab, you can select with the help of a simple wizard whether you wish to enrol for a course, an exam, or a minor. This means, for example, that you can choose from the courses from the compulsory part of your curriculum, or look for a course from the complete range on offer at the HU. Information about the enrolment period can be found in Section 4.3.3 of this Study Guide, and more details about enrolment are given in Section 3.2.
Enrolment overview If you would like to know for which courses and exams you have enrolled, go to the ‘Inschrijven’ (enrolment) tab, and look under the ‘Overzicht inschrijvingen’ (enrolment overview) heading. The overview only displays the courses and exams that are being given at present or in the future.
Confirmation of enrolment It sometimes happens that you think you have enrolled correctly for a course or exam, but there is no record of this in the relevant administration. To prevent this situation from arising, you receive a confirmation e-mail in your HU account each time you enrol. You should therefore always check that you have received this notice, and be careful not to delete it.
Unenrolling from courses and exams If you have enrolled for a course or exam and now wish to unenrol from it, click on the ‘Uitschrijven’ (unenrol) tab. Check the components (courses or exams) from which you wish to unenrol, and select unenrol. Unenrolment from a course or exam is only possible during a set period. You will receive a confirmation e-mail of your unenrolment. Be careful not to delete it.
Amending your personal details Use the ‘Personalia’ (personal details) tab to enter your change of address and to upload a passport-sized photograph. This will be used for your student identity card, a new version of which will be sent to you every year. If any of the information in the personal details section is incorrect, you should contact the Enrolments Office. Changes of address can also be entered via Studielink.
E-mail notification of results If you click on the ‘Aanvullende informatie’ (additional information) link, you can sign up to e-mails every time you receive a result. If 'E-mail resultaten' (e-mail results) is set to 'Aangemeld' (signed up), you will receive an e-mail whenever a result is entered into OSIRIS. If you have it set to 'Afgemeld' (not signed up), you will not.
29/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2.8.2.5
Password
Your HU password expires after a period of time, and you will receive an automatic request to enter a new password. This can be done from any workplace at the HU. You can also change your password from home via www.inloggen.hu.nl. The new password must consist of eight characters and contain both letters and numerals. You can also use this website to reset your password in case you have forgotten your old one; a one-off text message containing the new password will be sent to you. Please note: different passwords are needed for some elements of your study programme. If you have any questions or need assistance in relation to your password, go to the education desk (see Section 2.8.3) or the www.ict.hu.nl website.
2.8.2.6
Information security and privacy
The HU attaches a great deal of value to information security. We have applied measures to our entire infrastructure to ensure the maximum possible protection from misuse of the data at HU. In addition, there are rules with regard to the use of the computers and the HU network – these are contained in the IT code of conduct (see www.reglementen.hu.nl). You are expected to know and adhere to these rules. As a user, you can also take steps to improve security: Do not leave any computer you have logged into unattended; Do not tell anyone else your password; Remove immediately letters and lists containing confidential information from the printer; Mail any questions or comments regarding the topic of confidentiality to
[email protected]. The HU also has privacy regulations based on the Dutch Data Protection Act, which deals with the protection of personal information. The regulations describe, among other things, what information is confidential and what rules apply with regard to how it is used. The www.ict.hu.nl website has more information on this.
2.8.2.7
Recording your study progress
Your study results are recorded in the HU digital study progress system, OSIRIS. See Section 2.8.2.4. Study progress is expressed in study credits in accordance with the European Credit Transfer System (ECs). For each course that you conclude with a pass, you will be awarded the ECs available for that course. No ECs are awarded for interim exams. See also Section 4.4.
2.8.3
Education desk
The Faculty Education Office (FBO) is responsible for the planning and organization of the study programme and student administration. Students can go to the FEO for questions on, among other things, schedules, organization of exams and resits, study tracks and classroom groups, study progress reports, free choice component (minors, optional subjects) and graduation. Information on the organization and contents of the study programme and study results is to be found on Sharepoint (www.hu.nl/intranet.aspx). You can find the FEO in room 1S120 on the first floor.
FEO Office hours
Desk
Contact by phone(Number 088 -4813600)
(Room 1S120) Monday to Friday
8 am – 3 pm
Monday and Friday 8 am – 12.30 pm Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday 8 am- 15 pm
Monday evening
5.45 -6.15 pm 30/189
© Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
10.30 – 11.30 am 2 – 3 pm
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2.8.4
Study association
The aim of study associations is to help you enjoy your time as a student as much as possible. Study associations not only organize fun and social activities, but they also help you become involved with your programme, the HU, and your future professional field. The study associations at HU are united in the OSHU umbrella organization, which represents the interests of the various associations across the HU. For more information, go to the OSHU website: www.oshu.nl For ICM students there is the students‟ association Mosaic. Padualaan 99 / 3584 CH Utrecht / Room 1F160 Tel: 088-481 3299
2.8.5
Programme committees
There is a programme committee for each study programme. The committees are advisory bodies to the institution management, advising on such matters as the content of lessons, study progress advice that is given and the practical components of study programmes. The programme committees always include students among their number. If you have a good idea for improving your study programme, be sure to let the programme committee know! If you would like to become a member of your programme committee yourself, you can stand as a candidate at the next elections. You can get more information from the coach for administrative participation by students, who can be reached at
[email protected]. The coach also provides support to the programme committees.
2.9
Contact details
International Communication & Media, Faculty of Communication and Journalism (HU) Padualaan 99 3584 CH Utrecht
31/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
3 3.1
Courses Course participation
Your study programme curriculum is composed of ‘teaching units’, or courses. A course is a cohesive whole of the knowledge, insight, and skills to be acquired by the students, with a study load expressed in ECs. Each course is concluded with an exam. Every course is listed at the back of this Study Guide, and they are all published in OSIRIS (www.osiris.hu.nl) before the start of the academic year, as well as in the course descriptions in Section 3.5.
3.2
Enrolling for courses
You can only take a course if you have enrolled in OSIRIS (www.osiris.hu.nl) on time. You are responsible for doing this yourself, so you should always check to see if you are enrolled and print off the confirmation notice that you receive. If you are not correctly enrolled, you will not be able to take the course. It is possible to enrol (and unenrol) up to two weeks before the start of the period in which the course lessons take place. If you have enrolled for a course, you will be automatically enrolled for the first regular exam following the course. Should you not wish to take this exam, you must unenrol yourself from it no later than three weeks before the exam is held. See Section 4.3.3. If you enrol for a minor, this means you are enrolled for all the courses that make up the minor. Registering for courses is done by the student, so as a student you are responsible for this. After having registered for a course you are automatically registered for the first exam opportunity. Exception: first year students are officially registered by the Faculty Education Office (FBO) for the first block of the first year only. Students that have not registered for a course are not allowed to participate in that course.
3.3
Obligation to attend
It is very important for the sake of your study progress that you attend every lesson. You not only learn from your lecturer, but also through interacting with your fellow students. Year in, year out, it has been shown that students who attend every lesson perform better in their studies and complete their programme more quickly. For some courses, attendance is compulsory: this is stated in the course descriptions. See Section 3.5
3.4
Entry requirements
Every course is subject to certain entry requirements - see the course descriptions in Chapter 10. If you do not meet these requirements, you may not take the course unless the Board of Examiners has given you permission to do so. For more information about the procedure for applying for such permission, see Section 2.6.4.
3.5
Course descriptions
The descriptions of the courses in your study programme, which contain all relevant information, are listed at the back of this Study Guide. .
32/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
4
Exams
4.1
Introduction
Regular exams Each course concludes with an exam, designed to test your knowledge, insight, and skills. An exam may take the form of a test of the professional attitude of a student. The primary purpose of an exam, including group-based exams, is to compare what individual students have learned with the set objectives of the course. The Board of Examiners appoints the examiners who will set and mark the exams, and enter the results into OSIRIS. An exam can be split into more than one interim exam. An exam pass is defined as one for which a mark of 5.5 (out of 10) or more has been awarded – marks are rounded up to whole numbers (see Section 4.4.1.). If interim exams have been held, the exam as a whole is deemed to have been passed only when every interim exam has been taken, and when their collective results are sufficient for a pass. The course descriptions detail the weightings given to each interim exam, including any interim exams for which a minimum mark must be obtained.
Final exams Every study programme has two sets of final exams: at the end of the preliminary year and of the main stage. To pass these exams, you must fulfil the preset norms. This means that all the exams for the relevant stage of study must have been passed, and all the required ECs obtained (60 for the preliminary year, and 180 for the main stage). You can only take the exam at the end of the main stage if you have successfully completed the preliminary year. As soon as you have completed the preliminary year or main stage programme, the Board of Examiners will assess your results at their next meeting. If you have passed and have complied with all the other obligations in relation to the study programme, then the Board of Examiners will award you a diploma. Procedural rules apply here: see Section 5.1. Graduation component Anyone wishing to obtain a diploma must successfully complete the graduation component. The graduation component is a form of final exam and may involve a graduation thesis, assignment or project. It could also be a combination of several related core modules from which a clear picture of your final level of attainment can be derived. The graduation component consists of at least 15 ECs, and no exemptions are possible (unless the exemption is granted before 1 September 2012). The graduation component may consist of one course, but also of multiple third and fourth-year courses as designated by the study programme. You may only embark on the graduation component if you have successfully completed all your obligations relating to your preliminary year. In principle, a representative from the relevant professional field is always involved as an advisor.
4.2
Exemptions
The Board of Examiners can grant you an exemption from exams and interim exams. This means you do not have to take the course in question and that you will be awarded the study credits that go with it. By law, an exemption may only be granted if you are enrolled at the HU. The HU has decided only to grant exemptions on the basis of exams that the student has already passed, as follows: Previous education, on the basis of which you were admitted to the study programme; Exams that you passed that formed part of an accredited study programme; Exams during a study programme, the quality safeguards of which are comparable to those of the accreditation system (see below). This is especially important in the case of foreign study programmes. In the Netherlands, ‘accredited’ means the study programme in question has been subjected to an independent external audit by the Accreditation Organisation of the Netherlands and Flanders. In practice, every HBO and WO study programme for which you can enrol via Studielink meets this criterion. If other study programmes are involved, primarily those from other countries, the Board of Examiners will investigate whether the quality of the programmes is safeguarded in a similar manner. No exemptions are granted for the graduation component (project/thesis/assignment).
33/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014 It is true that in the past the HU was more generous in granting exemptions; any exemptions previously granted will continue to be valid and will not lapse. Exemptions are valid for six years and are granted by the Board of Examiners on the basis of the procedure listed in Article 40 of the HU Teaching and Examination Regulations for Bachelor’s programmes 2012-2013. In exceptional cases, the Board of Examiners may deviate from the six-year period. See Section 2.6.4. for general information about the procedure for requesting exemptions. Note: if you have more than 15 study credits of exemptions in your preliminary year, this could affect the norm for receiving a positive recommendation on the continuation of your studies. More information about this is available in Section 2.4.2 of this Study Guide. Discuss first with your study progress advisor whether it makes sense to apply for an exemption. Requests must always be accompanied by written documentary evidence (diploma, list of marks, declaration, etc.). Exemptions are shown in OSIRIS as ‘VRY-O’ (on the basis of previous education). In previous years, other codes were also used: ‘VRY-A’ (on the basis of an assessment of a certified RPL agency), ‘VRY-E’ (on the basis of knowledge and skills acquired elsewhere without an RPL assessment), or VRY (unspecified). Exemptions do not feature in any calculation of an average mark. Exemptions for subjects in the main stage may only be requested once you have formally been admitted to the main stage.
4.3
Organization of exams 4.3.1
Duration and form of exams
The purpose of exams is to test and assess the work you have done in your studies. This can take different forms, the most common of which are:
Exams with closed questions; Exams with open-ended questions; Exams with multiple-choice questions; Papers or other forms of written assignments; Portfolios; Reflective reports; Creating and/or giving a presentation or carrying out a task; An oral exam.
The course descriptions indicate whether or not an exam can be taken without your having taken the course. This is important if you believe you already possess the relevant competencies as a result of work, other experience or a nonrecognized form of schooling. As mentioned above (4.2.), the HU only grants exemptions on the basis of previous schooling, and not on the basis of other forms of experience. However, by taking an exam for which no attendance on the preceding course is necessary, you can ‘convert’ your experience into something tangible and accelerate your progress in the study programme. The examiners set the assignments, questions and assessment criteria and ensure (together with others who are involved with the exam) that the required secrecy is observed until the candidates have been given the questions. The amount of time available for each exam is given in OSIRIS and on the question paper, and is also announced by the invigilator. In exceptional circumstances, exams may be extended or curtailed.
34/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
4.3.2
Exam timetable
Most exams are given during the exam period at the end of every period (every block). Your study programme department will inform you of your exam timetable (possibly as part of the semester timetable). The timetable will be published no later than three weeks before the start of the exam period via the notice boards and OSIRIS (www.osiris.hu.nl). You can use your yearly timetable to see in which period certain courses are concluded. Exam retakes are held in the week preceding the final week of the period, except the retakes for the exams held in the final period. These are timetabled for the last full week in August, just before the start of the next academic year (which starts on 1 September). The exam timetables give exact information on which day, at what time, and in which room the exams (or retakes) are being held. Exams are planned as much as possible to be at the same time as the lessons. There may be cases where they are scheduled at a different time, in order to give you the opportunity to progress more quickly in your studies.
4.3.3 Enrolling for and taking exams (including resits) Enrolling for exams You may only take an exam if you have enrolled for it in OSIRIS (www.osiris.hu.nl) in time. You are responsible for this yourself, so you should always check to see whether you are enrolled and print off your confirmation notification. If you are not enrolled correctly, you may not take the exam. If you have enrolled for a course, you will be automatically enrolled for the first regular exam that follows it. If you do not wish to take the exam, you must unenrol from it no more than three weeks in advance. If you are enrolled for an exam but do not actually take it, your result will be recorded as ‘NA’ (‘not present’) in ORISIS. This is treated as an exam result, which means you will only have one more opportunity to sit the exam. Enrolling for exams that do not take place immediately after the course (that is, the retakes) is your responsibility. Number of exams / Retakes / Replacement assignment The number of times that an exam is held in one year is expressed in exam sittings. The number of times that a student may take the same exam is expressed in exam attempts. During the academic year, there are multiple dates for each course on which you may sit the exam. To find out when these dates are, see OSIRIS. For some courses there is only one exam sitting, because the nature of the course is such that a retake is not reasonably possible in the same academic year. Examples include internships. The course descriptions in Chapter 3 show when this situation applies. Please note! Taking a resit annuls all previous results obtained for the exam in question. I You do have to register for the resit (second exam opportunity and/or re-examination) yourself. Registration for the resits takes place in week 4 preceeding the exam period of a particular block. It is only possible to resit an exam if you fail the exam. By taking part in a resit, all previous results are cancelled. If you fail a practical assignment, you will have to do the practical again. In that case a second opportunity within the same study year cannot be guaranteed. Exam opportunities when changing or replacing a course In successive study years the names, forms and/or contents of courses and exams may be altered or replaced. In the study year following this change/replacement a student has two opportunities to do an
35/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014 exam based on the old course he or she has taken. Exam and resit opportunities Each study year you have two opportunities to take part in an exam of a course. Re-sitting exams is only possible if you do not pass the exam, unless the faculty OER stipulates that the Examination Board may determine otherwise. When you re-sit an exam, the previous results for the exam will be deleted. If you are registered for an exam, but do not sit the exam, then you will lose your option to sit exams in that academic year. You will be referred to the next, regular exam sitting. The abbreviation NA (NonAttendance) will be used to designate that a student registered for, but did not sit a written exam, and will be considered as an exam result. If you have run out of attempts at passing a particular exam, and have not yet passed it, you may request the Board of Examiners to grant you an extra attempt in the following circumstances. Events beyond your control If you are unable to take an exam because of events beyond your control, you should ask the Board of Examiners for an extra attempt at taking the exam. ‘Events beyond your control’ refers to one or more of the following: Illness; Physical or other functional disorder; Pregnancy; Exceptional family circumstances; Other situations, to be assessed by the Board of Examiners. The programme may also grant an extra exam attempt if it forms part of a policy aimed at students who have fallen behind with their studies (or who are likely to do so). Students more than three months behind schedule with their studies Students who: a. have taken the exam at least once, and b. who look likely to fall behind with their studies by at least three months; may submit a request to the Board of Examiners for an extra exam attempt.
Exam sitting in the event that a course is altered or replaced The name, form, or substance of courses and exams may change or be replaced from one year to the next. In the academic year after any such change or replacement, two exam sittings will take place based on the old course. As well as an extra exam attempt, you may also ask the Board of Examiners for a replacement assignment. This means that you take the exam in a form other than the regular version. The Board of Examiners may grant such a request if; a. You have the right to an exam attempt, and b. You have already taken the regular exam at least twice, and c. A lecturer of the subject has given a positive recommendation regarding your request, and d. You are likely to fall behind schedule in your studies by at least three months. The Board of Examiners will also give permission for a replacement assignment if the student is unable to take part in a compulsory introduction, excursion or work week as a result of events beyond his or her control or personal (including financial) circumstances.
4.3.4 Facilities for those with functional limitations General If you have a functional limitation or chronic illness, you can ask the Board of Examiners to modify facilities in order to allow you to take an exam in an amended form.
36/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014 If you fall into this category, you should contact the student counsellor as soon as possible (see Section 8.8). He will be able to advise you on the options available and to assist you with submitting your request. A functional limitation is defined as all physical, sensory and psychological conditions of a chronic – that is, of a longterm - nature. Some limitations are easily observable, such as sight impairment or a stutter. However, other conditions are not especially noticeable, if at all. Examples that come to mind are dyslexia, chronic fatigue, ADHD, RSI, rheumatoid arthritis, psychological conditions such as depression, forms of autism, such as PDD-NOS and Asperger’s Syndrome. See Section 8.8 for general information on studying with a functional limitation, and Section 2.6.4 for general information on the procedure for submitting a request to the Board of Examiners. You must submit any request for modified facilities to the Board of Examiners in writing and in good time, together with a statement from a specialist. ‘In good time’ means that the programme department has sufficient opportunity to deal with your request and to make the necessary logistical arrangements before the start of the exams to which it relates. The student counsellor can advise you on the submission of your request. Amenities and facilities The HU provides the following amenities: - Modified exam material (such as a larger typeface, different coloured paper because of dyslexia or visual impairment); - The use of a laptop during an exam; - Extension of the duration of an exam; - Physical amenities in the buildings (in relation to the accessibility, for example). It also provides the following facilities: - Digital programs like Kurzweil, intended primarily for students with dyslexia; - A place to rest; - Student psychologists.
General validity of amenities Any particular amenity granted by the Board of Examiners on account of a functional limitation or chronic illness will be valid for a limited time set by the Board. During the set period, you will be entitled to use the same amenity for taking another exam from a different study programme if:
You have notified the Board of Examiners of the other programme at the time of your enrolment and before the exam; At the start of an exam, you can show the written decision stating that the amenity has been granted; The Board of Examiners of the other programme has not refused your request for an amenity (any refusal must be in writing, and include the reasons for the refusal, and should be communicated to you before the exam takes place).
4.3.5 Proof of identity required for written exams To take a written exam, you must prove your identity using a valid HU student identity card. In addition, you should be able to prove your identity at all times with a valid identity document (see Section 9.2.5) – this is to prevent fraud. You may be asked to produce this during an exam, so make sure you always have it with you. If you do not have a valid student identity card, then you may only take exams if you have a valid exam pass and identity document with you. The following documents (which must still be valid) are recognized as identity documents: passport, European ID card, Dutch or international driving licence or refugee document.
37/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014 If you do not have a student identity card because you have not yet received one, then you may apply for an exam pass in the week before the exam period (no charge is made for this). This is valid only for the exam period stated on the card. If you do not have a student identity card because you have lost it or because it has been stolen, then you may apply for an exam pass during the exam period. This is valid only on the day on which it is issued; the cost is €25 per pass, up to a maximum of €100 for each exam period. You are entitled to a reimbursement of the costs if you are able to prove that you lost your student identity card as a result of events beyond your control (such as by presenting an official report from the police in case of theft). Exam passes will only be issued if you:
Are properly enrolled as a student at the HU; Show a valid identity document when making your application; Are enrolled for the exam in question. A student who loses his or her student ID card must also report this immediately at the FBO and apply for a new student ID card (and must pay the costs of replacement).
4.3.6 Procedures during exams Only registered students may take tests and qualifying tests. Students put their signature behind their printed name on the registration list after showing their student card to the invigilator. From that moment onwards participation in the test is a fact. Students sign the test with their initials before handing it in. If the student cannot identify himself/herself by means of a valid student card of by means of a test card in combination with a valid proof of identity, the student is not allowed to participate in the test and has to leave the room. With 'test card' is meant a written and signed statement of the faculty education office, proving that the student is registered for the course and may participate in the test. The student can apply for a test card in the week preceding the test period. This test card is only valid for the period indicated on the card. If necessary the course management makes sure that there are a sufficient number of invigilators during the taking of a test or part of a test. Students must immediately comply with the instructions of the examiner or invigilator before, during or directly following the test. Unless indicated otherwise, test questions cannot be taken home or copied in any way. Neither is this allowed when the student has access to the test afterwards. The student who is late for a test is not allowed into the test room. Students may leave the test room only half an hour after the start of the test. Visiting the toilet during the examination is only possible with permission and under supervision of an invigilator. When taking exams students may only use aids that are explicitly stated on the exam or test paper. Using any other means or instrument is considered a fraudulent activity.
4.4
Assessment 4.4.1 Assigning the marks; viewing the exam
Assessment of exams The marks given for exams (including interim exams) are expressed as follows: 38/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
As a figure on a scale of 1 to 10, whole numbers only; As a figure on a scale of 1.0 to 10.0, and to one decimal place; 2 In words: VRY (exemption); Pass/Fail; Fail, Pass, Pass Plus, Good, Very Good, Excellent.
The words correspond to the ten-point scale as follows: Excellent Very Good Good Pass Plus Pass Fail
10 9 8 7 6 ≤5
If you are enrolled for an exam but do not actually take it, your result will be recorded as ‘NA’ (not present) in ORISIS. This is treated as an exam result, which means you will only have one more opportunity to sit the exam, so if you do not wish to take an exam, make sure you unenrol from it in good time. No rights may be derived from any results communicated verbally. A student is considered to have passed an exam (or interim exam) if they achieve a mark of 5.5 or a pass or better, or if they have been given a VRY-O. The mark in figures must be at least 5.5 before any rounding off. This means that if the mark is below 5.50, it will be rounded down to 5.4 (and subsequently to 5, if the marks are to be expressed in whole numbers only). In other words, a 5.49 will be rounded down to 5.4, and not up to 5.5, and the student will have failed the exam in question. If an exam consists of multiple interim exams, it may be that not only the weighted average mark should be sufficiently high, but also that the marks given for the individual exams should reach a certain minimum level. If there is such a minimum level, this is listed in the course descriptions in Chapter 10. If you complete an exam successfully, you will be awarded the ECs for the course in question. No ECs are awarded for passing interim exams.
Announcement of exam results As proof that a student has taken an exam, the results are announced by the relevant examiner or examiners in OSIRIS (www.osiris.hu.nl). Exam results are always under reservation of arithmetical, typing and other errors. You can print off lists of results from OSIRIS, and you should check them. You should report any possible errors to the examiner or Board of Examiners no more than four weeks after the publication of the results in OSIRIS. Marks in OSIRIS can still be amended after they have been checked, or if the norms have been changed, or if it is clear that an error occurred when the marks were being entered. After the four-week period following the publication of the marks, they are deemed to be definitive. They may only be altered subsequent to the four-week period with the approval of the Board of Examiners. See Article 37 paragraph 4 of the HU Teaching and Examination Regulations for Bachelor’s programmes. 3
Exam results must be published within the following time frames : No later than three weeks after an exam has been sat; In the case of an oral exam, on the day of the exam itself. The result should be published in OSIRIS within three weeks. Viewing exams As a student, you have the right to view the exams you have done and which have been marked, whether for its own 2
Exemptions are shown as ‘VRY-O’ (on the basis of previous education) and, until the last academic year, as ‘VRY-A’ (on the basis of an assessment of a certified RPL agency), ‘VRY-E’ (on the basis of knowledge and skills acquired elsewhere without an RPL assessment), or VRY (unspecified). 3
A week is a period of seven successive days. Public holidays listed in OSIRIS do not count for this purpose. 39/189
© Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014 sake or as part of a post-exam consultation. You can view your work up to three weeks after the publication of the exam result, but no later than the resit. In exceptional cases, the Board of Examiners may deviate from this period, provided that the interests of students are not disproportionately harmed. The time at which exams may be viewed is given in the annual timetable. Students are not obliged to take part in any post-exam consultation or discussion, but you are entitled to view your written work during such meetings. You will also be given an explanation of why your exams were marked as they were. The lecturer presents the correct answers to the questions. The discussion also serves as an opportunity to raise any questions resulting from the comparison between your written work and the model answers presented by the lecturers.
4.4.2 Irregularities / fraud Fraud during exams is prohibited, and the penalties are severe. If you commit fraud (or are guilty of any other irregularities; see Article 38 of the HU Teaching and Examination Regulations for Bachelor’s programmes, 2012-2013), the Board of Examiners can take one or more of the following measures:
Exclusion from taking one or more exams for a period not exceeding one calendar year; Withholding of the diploma, declaration or certificate; Obligation to take a new exam on areas designated by the Board of Examiners, and in a form to be determined by the Board.
In serious cases, the Board of Examiners will advise the faculty management to terminate your enrolment at the HU permanently. You will then not be able to re-enrol for the same study programme at the HU. This advice will be given if: 1. You have been guilty of irregularities on a previous occasion for which you were unable to take exams for at least six months, or; 2. There are aggravating circumstances, for example if criminal behaviour was involved such as: o Threatening behaviour or violence; o Using forged documents (such as diplomas and lists of marks); 3. You have in your possession, without the permission of the lecturer, the exam (or part of it) or information on how the exam norms are to be applied, having obtained them through theft, misappropriation, handling stolen goods, or from a fellow student, for example. You will be given a hearing before the Board of Examiners takes a decision. The Board will inform you of its decision as soon as possible, but within two weeks. For details of the procedure in full, see Article 38 of the HU Teaching and Examination Regulations for Bachelor’s programmes (www.reglementen.hu.nl). If you unenrol upon receiving a penalty, then the penalty will be suspended and only reimposed when you re-enrol. The Board of Examiners is responsible for the quality of exams and may therefore be forced to take measures that also affect the interests of other students. This means that all exam results have to be declared null and void on occasions. It is also possible that the examiners or Board of Examiners have good reasons for suspecting that fraud has occurred, but that they do not have enough evidence and can therefore not impose a penalty. However, serious doubts remain in such cases about whether you have genuinely achieved your result through your own efforts. In that situation, the Board of Examiners may require that you take an additional exam. If you fail that, that is regarded as confirmation that the doubts were well-placed, and the result is annulled (code NV). If you pass the additional exam, then the original result from the first exam is upheld.
4.4.3 Keeping and returning exams Every exam is kept for at least six months after publication of the results, or until a decision has been reached in any appeals procedure relating to the result. For graduation products, the period is two years from the date of certification. Exams and graduation projects that are stored digitally are kept for seven years.
40/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014 You can get back your exams at your own request only after the storage period has lapsed. However, you may obtain photocopies of your work in the meantime (for which costs are payable). Every document relating to: exam results (passes); exemptions; the student’s enrolment; the issuing of diplomas and declarations; is kept for a period of thirty years, in accordance with the HU Student Privacy Regulations. This is supervised by the institute or departmental director.
4.4.4 Validity of results The results of exams, interim exams, internships and practical exercises are valid for six years, as are exemptions. Once it has lapsed, you may request the Board of Examiners to extend the validity, or it may rule that you must take an additional or replacement exam. Results from a successfully completed preliminary year and/or Associate Degree have unlimited validity.
41/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
5
Certification
5.1
Procedure for awarding certificates
The Board of Examiners will only award a certificate (or diploma) when the faculty management has declared that the procedural requirements have been met. Before such a declaration is made, a check is carried out to make sure you have complied with all your obligations with regard to the study programme. This means that you must have passed every exam, that you are properly enrolled as a student, and that you have met all your payment obligations. In principle, the diploma will be in Dutch, but an English-language version will be awarded if you so request. The International Diploma Supplement, which is issued free of charge with the Bachelor’s diploma and the Associate Degree, is always in English. You can only receive one diploma for each study programme. If you already have a diploma for the programme in question, and you subsequently take extra courses or complete a second specialization, you will not receive a second diploma – instead, you will be given a declaration stating what you have done. Anyone who is entitled to receive a diploma may ask the Board of Examiners to postpone the awarding of it. You should request this in writing, stating your reasons, no later than one week before the date of your last exam or completion of your final research project. If you ask that you receive your diploma at a later time, there are two possible reasons for doing so: 1. You are still in the process of completing a second specialization. In this case, both specializations will be listed on your diploma, the date of which will be the date of your final exam of your second specialization. 2. You are still in the process of completing extra courses. In this case, your diploma will be awarded for the exams you have taken as part of your study programme, and will bear the date of the final exam from the programme. For the extra courses, you will receive an additional declaration. Please note! When you have obtained your diploma, you will have to unenrol yourself from the study programme via Studielink. This is not automatic. Your liability to pay tuition fees only lapses when you are unenrolled.
5.2
‘Cum laude’ or ‘met genoegen’ (with merit)
If you achieve good marks, you may be eligible for a ‘cum laude’ or ‘met genoegen’ (with merit) endorsement on your diploma. This is not done automatically: you have to apply for it yourself if you believe you should be considered for it. It is only included on your diploma if you have requested it in advance. In order to get such an endorsement, you must meet each of the following requirements: Cum laude endorsement (see Article 44 paragraph 1 of the HU Teaching and Examination Regulations) For each of the courses in the main stage (except any exemptions), you must have achieved a mark of at least 6.0 (this is the mark achieved before any rounding off of figures to the right of the decimal point); The weighted average of all the marks achieved in the main stage (except any exemptions, and not including interim exams) must have been at least 8.0 (before any rounding off of the figures to the right of the decimal point); The final mark of the graduation assignment or final thesis must have been at least 8.0 (before any rounding off of the figures to the right of the decimal point); You have not been enrolled on the study programme for more than four academic years; You have not obtained more than 90 ECs in exemptions for the study programme in question; Results expressed with the words ‘Pass’, ‘Fail’ or ‘VRIJ’ do not count for the purposes of this assessment; the same is true for additional study credits (such as those obtained during an ‘excellent’ route).
42/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
‘Met genoegen’ (with merit) endorsement (see Article 44 paragraph 2 of the HU Teaching and Examination Regulations) For each of the courses in the main stage (except any exemptions), you must have achieved a mark of at least 6.0 (this is the mark achieved before any rounding off of figures to the right of the decimal point); The weighted average of all the marks achieved in the main stage (except any exemptions, and not including any interim exams) must have been at least 7.0 (before any rounding off of the figures to the right of the decimal point); The final mark of the graduation assignment or final thesis must have been at least 7.0 (before any rounding off of the figures to the right of the decimal point); You have not been enrolled on the study programme for more than four academic years; You have not obtained more than 90 study credits in exemptions for the study programme in question; Results expressed with the words ‘Pass’, ‘Fail’ or ‘VRIJ’ do not count for the purposes of this assessment; the same is true for additional study credits (such as those obtained during an ‘excellent’ route).
If you have been enrolled for more than four academic years as a result of acknowledged personal circumstances, the Board of Examiners may decide that you nonetheless should be considered for a ‘cum laude’ or ‘met genoegen’ endorsement, but you must have met all the other requirements. Scope The above only applies to you if you first took a course from the main stage of your study programme after 1 September 2005.
43/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
6
Timetables
6.1
Annual timetable
During both the preliminary year and the main stage, the curriculum is divided into five periods, A to E (or blocks 1 to 5). Periods A and B (blocks 1 and 2) together form one semester, as do periods C and D (blocks 3 and 4). Every year, an overview is drawn up of the periods for the forthcoming academic year, showing the weeks during which lessons will be given, the weeks during which exams will take place, and the holiday dates. The annual timetables of the faculties are available at www.roosters.hu.nl. The annual timetable for the study programme in the 2013-2014 academic year, divided into two semester timetables, is as follows:
FCJ ONDERWIJSJAARROOSTER 2013-2014 Periode A wk.nr datum 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
02 sep 09 sep 16 sep 23 sep 30 sep 07 okt 14 okt 21 okt.
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8
ond.wijsk. invulling onderwijsweek 1 onderwijsweek 2 onderwijsweek 3 onderwijsweek 4 onderwijsweek 5 onderwijsweek 6 onderwijsweek 7 onderwijsweek 8
44 45
28 okt 04 nov
A9 A10
onderwijsweek 9 onderwijsweek 10
Tentamenweek
Beschrijving
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7
ond.wijsk. invulling onderwijsweek 1 onderwijsweek 2 onderwijsweek 3 onderwijsweek 4 onderwijsweek 5 onderwijsweek 6 Onderwijsvrij
Periode B wk.nr Datum 46 47 48 49 50 51 52
11 nov 18 nov 25 nov 02 dec 09 dec 16 dec 23 dec
Beschrijving Start studiejaar 2013-2014
Advies vakantie docenten
onderwijsvrij e
01
30 dec
B8
Onderwijsvrij
e
Kerstvakantie; 25 en 26 dec. 1 en 2 Kerstdag 2013 Verplichte verlofdagen: 23, 24, 27 december 2013; schoolvakantie regio midden onderwijsvrij 1 januari 2014 nieuwjaarsdag. Rest van de week onderwijsvrij, geen verplichte verlofdagen; schoolvakantie regio midden
02 03 04 05
06 jan 13 jan 20 jan 27 jan
B9 B10 B11 B12
onderwijsweek 7 onderwijsweek 8 onderwijsweek 9 onderwijsweek 10
Tentamenweek
44/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Periode C wk.nr datum 06 07 08
03 feb 10 feb 17 feb
C1 C2 C3
ond.wijsk. invulling onderwijsweek 1 onderwijsweek 2 onderwijsweek 3
09 10 11 12 13 14 15
24 feb 03 mrt 10 mrt 17 mrt 24 mrt 31 mrt 07 apr
C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10
onderwijsweek 4 onderwijsweek 5 onderwijsweek 6 onderwijsweek 7 onderwijsweek 8 onderwijsweek 9 onderwijsweek 10
Beschrijving
5 mei 2014 Bevrijdingsdag 2014
Periode D wk.nr datum
Beschrijving
Onderwijsweek FCJ (eventueel ook ‘onderwijsluw’)
Tentamenweek
16 17 18
14 apr 21 apr 28 apr
D1 D2 D3
ond.wijsk. invulling onderwijsweek 1 onderwijsweek 2 onderwijsweek 3
19 20 21
05 mei 12 mei 19 mei
D4 D5 D6
onderwijsweek 4 onderwijsweek 5 onderwijsweek 6
22 23 24 25 26
26 mei 02 jun 09 jun 16 jun 23 jun
D7 D8 D9 D10 D11
onderwijsweek 7 onderwijsweek 8 onderwijsweek 9 onderwijsweek 10 onderwijsweek 11
Beschrijving
E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9
ond.wijsk. invulling onderwijsweek 1 onderwijsweek 2 onderwijsweek 3 onderwijsweek 4 onderwijsweek 5 onderwijsweek 6 onderwijsweek 7 onderwijsweek 8 onderwijsweek 9
A1
onderwijsweek 1
Start studiejaar 2014-2015
Periode E wk.nr datum 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
30 jun 07 jul 14 jul 21 jul 28 jul 04 aug 11 aug 18 aug 25 aug
18 april Goede Vrijdag 2014 21 april 2e Paasdag 2014 Onderwijsweek FCJ (eventueel ook ‘onderwijsluw’)
29 mei 2014 Hemelvaartdag 2014, 30 mei 2014 verplichte verlofdag e
9 juni 2 Pinksterdag 2014; Tentamenweek
Zelfstudieweek / inschrijvingen herkansingen Herkansingen / hertentamens Nakijk / cijferverwerking Uitsturen BSA’s / adviesvakantie Schoolvakantie regio midden Schoolvakantie regio midden Schoolvakantie regio midden Schoolvakantie regio midden Schoolvakantie regio midden; opstarten studiejaar 2014-2015
Periode A 36
02 sep
vet = officiële feestdag italic = verplichte verlofdagen Vetblauw = FCJ specifieke vaststelling
45/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
6.2
Holidays and free days
Holiday dates, 2013-2014 In the 2013-2014 academic year, the dates shown below will be compulsory holidays at the HU: Vakantie Kerstvakantie Verplichte vrije dagen, inclusief de feestdagen e e 1 en 2 kerstdag Nieuwjaarsdag Goede vrijdag e e 1 en 2 paasdag Koninginnedag Bevrijdingsdag Hemelvaartsdag Dag na Hemelvaartsdag e e 1 en 2 Pinksterdag
6.3
Data 23 december 2013 t/m 3 januari 2014
25 en 26 december 2013 1 januari 2014 18 april 2014 20 april en 21 april 2014 30 april 2014 5 mei 2014 29 mei 2014 30 mei 2014 8 juni en 9 juni 2014
Days and times of lessons
Lesson days During the week the lessons are in principle scheduled from Mondays until Fridays from 8.30 am – 6.30 pm
Lesson times The student has to be in the room in time to follow the lessons. Late arrivals can be refused access. In principle the programme follows the following teaching schedule. Table teaching schedule lesson 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Break 10 11 Break 12 13
6.4
Start 8.30 am 9.30 am 10.30 am 11.30 am 12.30 pm 1.30 pm 2.30 pm 3.30 pm 4.30 pm
end 9.30 am 10.30 am 11.30 am 12.30 pm 1.30 pm 2.30 pm 3.30 pm 4.30 pm 5.30 pm
6.15 pm 7.00 pm
7.00 pm 7.45 pm
8.00 pm 8.45 pm
8.45 pm 9.30m
Opening hours of buildings
Monday to Thursday from 7 am – 10 pm
46/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014 Friday from 7 am – 6 pm During holidays the building is open from 8 am – 6.30 pm.
6.5
Timetable information and alterations
Announcements about lessons and exams will be communicated via your study programme intranet and, wherever possible, via notice boards and your student mail. The same applies to corrections and additions to this Study Guide. The HU assumes that the postal address you have given to the student administration is correct and that you check your HU e-mail account on a regular basis. For each period, a weekly timetable will be set, listing which courses are being given at which time and by which lecturer, in which classroom and for which group. The idea is that you note the information that is relevant to you. This timetable will be published no later than one week before the start of the new period. Lecturer absent In the event that a lecturer is absent or ill, the programme will make every effort to ensure that lessons can continue. If a lesson is cancelled, you will be notified via SharePoint and, wherever possible, via the notice boards and your student mail. When the lecturer returns, he or she will discuss with you how the course material that was due to be covered in the lessons that were cancelled, will be dealt with. Student absent If you are ill, you must inform the lecturer if attendance on your course is compulsory. In the event that you are ill for a long time (or if you expect to be), you should inform your study progress advisor as soon as possible and contact your student counsellor (see Section 8.2). Timetables, and timetable alterations, can be found on the timetable site: www.roosters.hu.nl.
47/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
7
Complaints, objections, appeals
7.1
Introduction
If you do not agree with a decision, if you believe that another person has misbehaved towards you, or if something else is not as it should be, you can do something about it. The first step is to contact the person causing the problem directly, and to try to resolve it jointly. The HU expects lecturers, study progress advisors and Boards of Examiners to be willing to listen to complaints and to do all they can to deal with them. But of course it is possible that you are unable to resolve situations in this way, or that you are not keen to speak to someone who has been harassing you. You then have the option of the ‘formal route’. The formal route at the HU exists on two levels, and is available to students and prospective students. The first level on which to pursue a matter is your faculty. This involves an objections or complaints procedure. You may submit your objection or complaint directly to the body concerned, but if you do not know where to go, or if you need advice, you can contact the faculty’s Legal Protection desk on
[email protected], which is located in the faculty at FBO. A standard form is available on which you can describe your objection or complaint. The Legal Protection desk will ensure that it is delivered to the appropriate part of the faculty. The form can be found on the www.klachtenwegwijzer.hu.nl website. The faculty desk may refer you to the student counsellor or, in the case of complaints about behaviour, to the confidential counsellor. They will be able to advise you about the procedures. Like the student mediators, they provide support for attempts at reaching solutions through discussions, thereby preventing the need for using official procedures. If the objections or complaints procedures at your faculty have not dealt with your objection or complaint to your satisfaction, you can submit an appeal (in the case of an objection) or a request for a review (in the case of a complaint) through the HU Legal Protection for Students Desk, who will ensure that they are dealt with by the appropriate body. The HU desk can also inform you about the procedures. You can also submit an appeal or complaint directly to the HU Legal Protection for Students Desk – that is, without first going through the objections and complaints procedures in your faculty. However, the faculty procedures are specially designed to be quicker and less formal. If you do not agree with their outcome, you can always try the HU desk. You are therefore advised to always use the extra faculty option and submit your objections and complaints there. In the description that follows, it is assumed that this is what you would do. Take careful note of the time limits! If you submit an objection or complaint to the faculty, it should be within two weeks after the decision or event to which they relate. In the case of appeals and requests for a review, you should contact the HU Legal Protection for Students Desk within six weeks of the date on which the faculty reached its decision. The various procedures are explained below, and the procedure is illustrated in a diagram at the end of the chapter.
7.2
Objections
Objections may be made against decisions taken on the basis of the Teaching and Examination Regulations. These are decisions that are directly related to teaching and exams, such as exam assessment, amenities, and a binding negative recommendation on the continuation of your studies. It only concerns decisions that are aimed at you as an individual student. Decisions often state that you may submit an objection, but not always. For example, you may object if you believe that you have been given an incorrect mark for an exam you have taken, even though no mention is made of the option of objecting on the OSIRIS page where the marks are published. You should submit a written objection to the faculty desk
[email protected] or Board of Examiners within two weeks of the publication of the decision to which you object. A standard form is available for this purpose. If you hand in your objection to the desk, it will ensure that it is sent on to the Board of Examiners. The Board of Examiners may ask you to give a verbal explanation of your objection, in which case you will be invited to attend a hearing. In principle, the Board of Examiners will reach a decision within two weeks of receiving your objection. You will be informed of the decision in writing. The decision will be based on a fresh assessment and must be substantiated.
48/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014 If your objection is upheld, the Board of Examiners will also make a new decision on the matter in question. If your objection is rejected, the original decision will stand. In the event of the latter, you may submit an appeal to the HU Legal Protection for Students Desk within six weeks of the announcement of the ruling on your objection. It is also possible to object to a decision taken by your departmental or faculty management – in the case of a refusal to provide a particular amenity, for example, or if a disciplinary measure has been imposed. The same procedure applies in this case. The complete objections procedure is described in the Legal Protection for Students Regulations, and the procedure relating to the Board of Examiners is dealt with in Article 45 of the HU Teaching and Examination Regulations for Bachelor’s programmes (www.reglementen.hu.nl).
7.3
Appeals 7.3.1
Lodging an appeal
You can appeal against decisions and against decisions on objections that have been taken on the grounds of the Teaching and Examination Regulations, such as exam marks, amenities, and binding negative recommendations on the continuation of your studies. This is also the case with decisions on objections relating to other matters, including enrolment on and unenrolment from the study programme, financial matters, disciplinary measures, and so on. Within six weeks of the announcement of a decision, you may submit a written appeal to the HU Legal Protection for Students Desk. You can do this digitally, via
[email protected], but you must also send it by post, and sign it. The HU desk will make sure that your appeal is dealt with by the appropriate body. This may be the Board of Appeal for Examinations (for most decisions taken by the Board of Examiners) or the Disputes Advice Committee (decisions taken by the programme or faculty management on the basis of the Higher Education and Research Act). These are independent bodies operating across the HU to which students (including prospective and external students) can appeal. In other words, they have no links to any particular faculty or study programme. Your appeal must be signed and contain at least the following:
Your name, student registration number, your home address, and telephone number; The name of the faculty and department/study programme on which you are enrolled; The date; A clear description of the decision (with date) against which the appeal is directed, including the name of the person or body that took the decision; The ground or grounds on which your appeal is based; What you are demanding, described as accurately as possible.
You must also enclose a copy of the disputed decision. Send your appeal to: HU-Loket Rechtbescherming Studenten, Postbus 573, 3500 AN Utrecht. If your appeal is to be dealt with by the Board of Appeal concerning Examinations, it will first decide whether it is wellfounded or unfounded. If your appeal is deemed well-founded, this often means that the Board of Examiners that took the original decision will have to take a new one. The Board of Appeal concerning Examinations does not make that decision itself. If your appeal is declared unfounded, the original decision stands. If your appeal is to be dealt with by the Disputes Advice Committee, it will investigate the matter at hand before issuing a recommendation to the Executive Board, which will take a decision on the basis of that recommendation. The Disputes Advice Committee also advises the Executive Board on whether your appeal is well-founded or unfounded. If the Executive Board accepts the recommendation, it will order the management to take a new decision in the event that the appeal is deemed well-founded.
49/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
The HU Legal Protection for Students Regulations (www.reglementen.hu.nl) describe the procedures in greater detail. For more information, go to www.klachtenwegwijzer.hu.nl. Information and advice can also be obtained from your student counsellor (see Section 8.2) or the secretarial offices of the HU Legal Protection for Students Desk, tel. 0884818594.
7.3.2
Further appeals
If you do not agree with the verdict of the Board of Appeal concerning Examinations or the decision of the Executive Board, you may lodge an appeal externally, to the Higher Education Appeal Board in The Hague. Information about the procedure and time limits can be found on the following website: www.cbho.nl.
7.4
Complaints 7.4.1 Submitting a complaint
There are some decisions and forms of behaviour by other students or employees against whom you cannot make an objection, but you can still submit a complaint. This should be done within two weeks, and here, too, you can use the standard form, which you can download from www.klachtenwegwijzer.hu.nl. You can submit your complaint to the faculty desk
[email protected] or directly to the body concerned. The faculty desk will ensure that your complaint is dealt with by the appropriate body. The procedure is very similar to that for objections. The body that deals with your complaint may give you an opportunity to attend a hearing. If your complaint relates to a fellow student or an employee, they will always be given an opportunity to respond to your complaint. In principle, you can expect a decision about your complaint to be made within two weeks. If you do not agree with this decision, you can submit a request for a review of the decision, within six weeks, to the HU Legal Protection for Students Desk. You can also submit an oral complaint to the faculty desk, in which case the standard form will be filled in on the spot. The procedure does not apply to decisions of a general nature.
7.4.2 Requesting a review of how a complaint has been dealt with If you are not satisfied with how the faculty has dealt with your complaint, you can submit a request that it be reviewed to the HU Legal Protection for Students Desk. This must be done within six weeks from the decision taken as a result of your complaint. You can submit your request for a review digitally, to
[email protected], but you must also sign it and send it by post, to: HU-Loket Rechtbescherming Studenten, Postbus 573, 3500 AN Utrecht. The HU Legal Protection for Students Desk will ensure that your request is dealt with by the appropriate body. For most complaints, this is the Student Complaints Committee, unless your complaint concerns undesirable behaviour, in which case it will be dealt with by the Undesirable Behaviour Complaints Committee. See Section 7.5, below. These are both independent complaints bodies that operate across the HU and have no links to any of the faculties. They make recommendations to the Executive Board, which then reaches a decision. The HU Legal Protection for Students Regulations and the Regulations on Undesirable Behaviour (www.reglementen.hu.nl) describe the procedures in greater detail.
7.5
Undesirable behaviour
It may be the case that your complaint relates to conduct that is so intimidating that it falls under the rules governing undesirable behaviour. This could be verbal or sexual harassment, for example, the consequences of which can be very serious. The faculty desk will always refer you to the option of contacting a confidential counsellor (see 8.4). If you
50/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014 submit a complaint, you may decide to have it dealt with by the faculty (the complaint will be investigated either by the programme director or by someone acting on his behalf) or to place it before the HU Undesirable Behaviour Complaints Committee. The complaint will then be forwarded to the HU Legal Protection for Students Desk. The time limit for submitting a complaint about undesirable behaviour is two years after the behaviour in question has occurred.
7.6
Complaints, objections and appeals diagram
Issue? Step 1: Direct approach (informal) Objections procedure Step 2: Faculty desk Complaints procedure
Board of Appeal concerning Examinations Step 3: HU desk
Disputes Advice Committee Student Complaints Committee
Undesirable Behaviour Complaints Committee /FG-P
51/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
8 8.1
Student Affairs Student support and guidance
Introduction As an HBO graduate, you are supposed to be able to act independently, so you will be encouraged during the study programme to do so and to show initiative. Our type of teaching stimulates critical and independent learning through problem-driven and project-based lessons. This means that you are responsible for your own learning process and study progress. The study programmes at the HU provide the right preconditions and the right type of support. The programme provides support and guidance for students in the various facets of the studying and learning process. We make a distinction between four types of guidance: that which relates to the actual programme content, to studyrelated skills, to your study progress, and to personal problems, whether study-related or otherwise. The HU assumes that you will seek out these forms of support and guidance on your own initiative. Support and guidance in relation to your study progress As a student, you are entitled to the services of a study progress advisor, who will help you in the development of your competencies. Based on your competency development and your results, he or she will monitor your study progress and act accordingly. The tasks of the study progress advisor include:
8.2
Monitoring and discussing your study results; Together with you, drawing up a study plan in the event that you have received an interim warning on the continuation of your studies; Advising you on the choices that are important in the context of your study programme; Referring you to a student counsellor if your questions and problems are not directly related to your studies (personal circumstances, student grants, objections and appeals).
Talent Grant
The Talent Grant is a provision for financial support for students, and consists of four different schemes. Graduation support scheme This grant enables HU students who have fallen behind in their studies as a result of exceptional circumstances during the period of receiving their regular student grant to complete their studies as soon as possible, or to continue with them. Administrative grant scheme Students who are members of the administration of an association may be eligible for an administrative grant. The scheme explains how HU students who perform recognized administrative activities, either during or within twelve months of the end of the period in which they are entitled to a regular grant, can receive assistance. See Section X. Knowledge grants Financial support for non-EEA students who have to pay institutional tuition fees instead of statutory tuition fees. Top-level sports scheme The HU has a number of arrangements in place that allow students who also compete in sports at a high level to combine their activities as effectively as possible. The arrangements are made available on the basis of the individual circumstances of the student. Each of the schemes is described in a separate chapter. The Talent Grant also includes provisions of a general nature, which apply to all these forms of support. The Talent Grant only covers full-time or dual students at the HU who first
52/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014 received a regular student grant on or after 1 September 1996 for a study programme at the HU or any other higher education institution or university (performance-related grant students). See www.reglementen.hu.nl for information on the Talent Grant. It is important that you notify your student counsellor of any exceptional circumstances affecting you in order to increase your chances later of being eligible for Talent Grant support. See Section X.
8.3
Student counsellor
HU student counsellors give you information, advice and guidance. Every faculty and HU Amersfoort has one or more student counsellors. They are there to support you in dealing with questions or problems during your studies. Student counsellors can also refer you to other bodies or individuals, such as the HU psychologist or HU doctor. Everything you discuss remains confidential. The student counsellors are bound by the HU Student Counsellor Regulations and the Code of Conduct of the HU Student Counsellor Platform. Study progress and personal circumstances You may find yourself falling behind in your studies as a result of family or relationship problems, for example. Psychological problems, chronic or other illness or a functional limitation may also hinder your progress, or it could be that you need to interrupt your studies because of a long stay in hospital. Another possible obstacle is the fear of failure. The student counsellor can help you clear up the problem and look for solutions. He can also help you look for other forms of assistance. Study advice and procedures The student counsellors have an advisory function in the procedure by which recommendations for continuation of studies are issued if there are exceptional circumstances. They are very well versed with the regulations in which the rights and obligations of students and those of the HU are set down. The student counsellors can give you advice and support if you are involved with an objection or appeals procedure. They are the people to contact if you have doubts about your studies, your choice of profession or if you need advice on follow-up study programmes. Financial matters Financial problems can be a headache, especially when you are in a real emergency situation and find yourself without any money, as a result of events beyond your control, for example. In some cases, you can apply for financial assistance from the Talent Grant. Your student counsellor will be able to advise you on this.
Contact information student counsellors FCJ Sven Mettivier -Meyer Room 1E200 Tel. (088) 481 35 72 Sandra Knopper Room 1E190 Tel. (088) 481 35 12
It is also possible to make an appointment by sending an e-mail to:
[email protected]
For more information, go to www.studentendecanaat.hu.nl. See also Article 40 of the Student Charter and the HU Student Counsellor Regulations (www.reglementen.hu.nl). Study Choice Centre If you have doubts about your study programme, if you are stuck in a rut, or if you would like to continue studying after your Bachelor’s degree, you can go to the Study Choice Centre, a joint HU and Utrecht University initiative. Here, you can get advice and ask for support in relation to your choice of study. For more information, go to www.centrumstudiekeuze.nl.
53/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
8.4
Confidential counsellor
The confidential counsellor is available for anyone, students and employees alike, who is (or has been) the victim of undesirable behaviour. Examples of undesirable behaviour are physical violence, aggression, verbal and sexual harassment, discrimination, dishonesty, and racism. However, it also extends to inappropriate touching, jokes made in poor taste, harassment and intimidating e-mails or text messages. Everyone determines for themselves the boundaries beyond which no-one else should go. In other words, people have different ideas of what constitutes undesirable behaviour: this could be due to differences in background and upbringing. Undesirable behaviour can have a profound effect on people, sometimes to the extent that it makes them ill. Many people believe that the behaviour will end if it is ignored, but this is rarely the case. Anyone who is affected by undesirable behaviour, in whatever form, will require courage to talk about it. Experience has shown time and again that talking helps, and for that you can go to the confidential counsellor. Your anonymity will be guaranteed and your information will be treated as confidential. If you contact the confidential counsellor, he or she and you will together look at how the undesirable behaviour can be stopped as soon as possible. Whatever action is taken, you will be consulted first – nothing is done without your consent. If you wish, the confidential counsellor can provide you with support for an extended period of time. The ‘Vertrouwenspersoon voor studenten en medewerkers’ (confidential advisor for students and employees) brochure is available from the confidential advisor . More information is also available at www.studentzaken.hu.nl. The Regulations on Undesirable Behaviour and other relevant information can be found on the public website of the HU confidential advisors: www.vertrouwenspersoon.hu.nl. See Article 51 of the Student Charter and the Regulations on Undesirable Behaviour (www.reglementen.hu.nl). If you would like to report undesirable behaviour, you are free to approach any confidential advisor, including those in a faculty other than your own. Confidential advisers for the Faculty Communication and Journalism are: Marcella Polis; room 2C120; tel. (088) 481 34 41 Sandra van Dillen; room 2F220; tel. (088) 481 30 94
8.5
Students’ doctor
If you come to Utrecht not just to study, but also to live, you must register with the Utrecht city council. Under the terms of your healthcare insurance, you are also obliged to register with a doctor in Utrecht. As a student, you can register with the Huisartsenpraktijk Campus Uithof via www.huisartsdeuithof.nl, regardless of where you live in Utrecht. This general practice operates from two addresses in the city, on Uithof in Casa Confetti (Leuvenplein 10-11) and in the Galgenwaard stadium (Herculesplein 379). If you miss exams or have to suspend your studies through illness, or if you have to apply for support from the Talent Grant, you may sometimes have to provide a doctor’s note. Not every GP is prepared to issue a note on behalf of a third party. In addition, the Royal Dutch Medical Association has put out a guideline stating that the doctor treating a patient is not the right person to write such a note. Whenever you need a statement about your health, you should first ask your own GP. If he cannot or will not provide you with one, then you can go to the students’ doctor. The only person who can refer you to the students’ doctor is the student counsellor (see Section 8.3). The HU students’ doctor is Huisartsenmaatschap Therapeuticum Utrecht, telephone (030) 275 95 00, Dekhuyzenstraat 60, 3572 WN in Utrecht.
8.6
Student Psychologist Office
54/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014 It may be that you encounter difficulties during your studies. This could be directly related to your studies, but it could also be of a more personal nature and have a negative impact on your study progress. If you are unable to resolve your situation yourself, you can contact the HU Student Psychologist Office, which is based in Utrecht and Amersfoort. Over the course of several conversations with you, the psychologist will look for a solution to your problems. The maximum number of conversations is eight (of fifty minutes’ duration), but it is possible you will not need that amount. As well as individual consultations, the Student Psychologist Office organizes group training courses on matters such as fighting fear of failure, assertiveness, and the ‘Niet Piekeren’ (don’t worry) course, in cooperation with Indigo. It may be that the help offered by the students’ psychologist does not meet your problems or expectations. In that case, the Student Psychologist Office will be able to assist you in finding other organizations that offer help. To get in contact with the Student Psychologist Office, you first need to be referred by a student counsellor, so you should contact him or her in order to get a referral. You will then be able to drop by or call by phone during the consultation hours. Everything is confidential. Apart from yourself and the Student Psychologist Office, nobody will know about the nature of your conversation. If you wish – and the choice is entirely yours – you may involve other people. For students, these services are free of charge. You can find more information at www.bureaustudentenpsychologen.hu.nl.
8.7
Mediation
Are you having trouble working alongside a fellow student? Are you locked in a dispute with your lecturer? Are there problems in your student accommodation? There is a good chance that a student mediator can help! Mediation is a way of resolving disputes. Together you look for a solution, assisted by a neutral and independent mediator. The mediator gives you the opportunity to discuss every area of disagreement, helps re-establish lines of communication and improve the relationship between the relevant parties. Mediators do not put forward any solutions themselves, but help you find the solutions that best suit everybody. If you would like to know more about student mediation, of if you would like to use the services of one, contact HU Mediation for advice or help on (088) 4819838 or www.mediation.hu.nl. You can find more information at www.mediation.hu.nl or www.studentvoorzieningen.hu.nl.
8.8
Studying with a functional limitation
If you have a functional limitation or a chronic illness, we advise you to contact a student counsellor in your faculty at the start of the academic year, even if you do not think you will need any help. You can contact him or her by mail, telephone, or by calling in person. The www.studentendecanaat.hu.nl site has details of the student counsellors in your faculty. Having a functional limitation or a chronic illness can cause you to fall behind in your studies or even drop out of studying altogether. Modifications and provisions It is a good idea to inform your study progress advisor and a student counsellor in your faculty of any limitations you have as soon as possible, so that any provisions that may be needed can be arranged in good time. In an intake conversation with a student counsellor in your faculty, you can discuss what functional limitation or chronic illness you have and what problems may occur during your studies. This is followed by an examination of what provisions or measures need to be taken, if any. The student counsellor will give an indication of how realistic it will be to make the necessary modifications in order for you to be able to study successfully; if something is impossible, they will mention that too. If no measures are needed (yet), the student counsellor will discuss the next steps to be taken in the event that problems do occur. Naturally, everything you discuss with the student counsellor will be in complete confidence. What is a functional limitation?
55/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014 A functional limitation is defined as all physical, sensory and psychological conditions of a chronic – that is, of a longterm – nature. Some limitations are easily observable, but other conditions are not especially noticeable, if at all. Examples that come to mind are dyslexia, chronic fatigue, ADHD, RSI, rheumatoid arthritis, psychological conditions such as depression, forms of autism, such as PDD-NOS and Asperger’s Syndrome. More information about studying with a functional limitation or chronic illness can be found in Section 4.3.4 of this Study Guide, and at www.onbelemmerdstuderen.hu.nl.
8.9
Improving your language and writing skills
If you have problems with spoken and written Dutch, ask your student counsellor for information about the available options for improving them. You can also use the digital language desk for the same purpose, at www.taalloket.hu.nl, or take a course at the James Boswell Instituut. See www.jbi.uu.nl
8.10
Media centre
As an HU student, you can use your student identity card to gain free admission to all HU media centres. You are also entitled to free membership of the Utrecht University Library. As well as books and journals, the media centres have an extensive digital collection, and you can use the www.mediatheek.hu.nl website to visit the media centres digitally. The site also gives you access to the HU catalogue in which you can search in all the media centre collections. In addition, you have access to reference works and internet sources that are relevant to education at the HU. In addition, each faculty has its own portal in which the sources for individual subjects are located together. See Article 41 of the Student Charter (www.reglementen.hu.nl).
8.11
International Office
HU students are given the opportunity to go abroad to study or go on an internship. For some students, it is actually a compulsory part of their Bachelor’s programme, while all other students can use their optional subjects component for this purpose. With regard to student exchange schemes, the HU focuses on European partners, although it has had contacts for many years with partners in countries outside Europe, such as China, Thailand, and South Africa. If you are interested in spending six months studying in another European country, such as France, the UK, Germany, or Spain, or further afield, like Canada, the United States, China, the International Office will be able to help you. There is an International Office desk at the FEM and HU Amersfoort. At HU Oudenoord 330, there is a Student Service Desk for questions of a general nature. Here you can also pick up relevant forms and the ‘Study & Internship Abroad Guide’. There is also more information about locations and opening times at www.io.hu.nl. For more specific questions, your best option is to make an appointment on (088) 481 89 28 or at
[email protected]. Alternatively, you can come to the ‘Wil Weg Dag’ to find out about studying and internships abroad. This event is organized by the International Office every year, on the second Tuesday in October.
8.11.1
Study abroad
The HU has a large number of partner universities inside and outside Europe that operate student exchange schemes. Contacts with these partner universities are maintained by the International Office, which can also organize your enrolment there. It provides any relevant information to the partner university during your stay abroad, and it collects and processes all the evaluations and exam marks upon your return. If you would like to sign up for an HU exchange programme and international minor, go to www.io.hu.nl and look under Study Abroad for the options, conditions and forms. Another useful section is Grants & Scholarships. NOTE: the deadline for signing up to study abroad is at the end of January – in other words, it is not the same as for other minors. The exact date will be announced in SharePoint.
8.11.2
Internship abroad
If you would like to go on an internship abroad, you should contact the internship office or your programme internship coordinator. They will inform you about the procedure to follow, and they must also approve your internship place. You are responsible for finding an internship place yourself, although an internship coordinator or the internship office may 56/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014 sometimes help you with this. Make sure you start looking in plenty of time – a year in advance is usually advisable, especially if you are considering going on an internship outside Europe. Arranging visas and other practical matters can sometimes take a long time. Go to www.io.hu.nl and look under Grants & Scholarships for more information on those topics, or make an appointment with an International Office employee on (088) 481 89 28. For internships within Europe, you may be eligible for an Erasmus Placement grant, for example. Another good source of information is www.wilweg.nl, including useful internship sites and a checklist. See Section 2.5.3 for more information about internship opportunities on your study programme.
8.12
Student participation
Students who are enthusiastic, involved, and keen to learn are essential to the HU. If you believe it is important for students’ views to be aired and thereby contribute to the quality of teaching, and you would like to gain some administrative experience during your time as a student, or if you are just curious, critical, and have some good ideas of your own, then get involved with the committees or councils where you can exercise some influence on your own education, how your faculty is run, or policies at HU level. For more information, go to www.medezeggenschap.hu.nl or www.bps.hu.nl. You can also contact the coach for administrative participation by students, on
[email protected], who will inform, support and coach you in the student participation bodies at the HU, and who organizes relevant activities such as workshops, training days, and social events for students who are actively involved in administrative duties.
8.12.1
Consultation bodies
What topics matter most to you? The content of your study programme? The way your faculty is run? Or perhaps HUlevel strategic policies? You can take part in the consultation process at all three levels and gain some administrative experience, all of which will be useful in your later life: Your study programme has a Programme Committee, about which more information is given in Section 2.8.5. The way in which your faculty is run is discussed in the Faculty Participation Council. The policies of the faculty management are put before the council for approval. Examples that come to mind are IT policies, policies relating to flexible working, and the faculty budget. The council can itself put items on the agenda and discuss them with the board. Every faculty has its own council, consisting of nine employees and nine students. The Central Employees’ and Students’ Council is the Executive Board’s discussion partner. Policies that affect the whole of the HU are put to the council for its approval. Among the items covered are strategic policies, the Teaching and Examination Regulations, policies relating to the buildings, and policies relating to quality. The council, which consists of ten employees and ten students, also discusses affairs with the Supervisory Board every year. The consultation bodies can exercise influence in numerous ways, with the ultimate aim being to raise the level of education provided at the HU. For more information about participation and the consultation bodies, go to www.medezeggenschap.hu.nl.
8.12.2
Support for students who are involved with administrative duties
The HU encourages you, as a student, to be involved with administrative duties in order to help you gain practical administrative and organizational skills. At the same time, we are keen to see enthusiastic and involved students who are eager to learn contribute towards the development of policies at the HU. For that reason, students who are involved with administrative duties benefit from the following. As a student member of a consultation body, you can have free and unlimited training in certain competencies. There is a handbook for student members of the central council, faculty council or Programme Committee.
57/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014 You can use the intranet that has been specially set up for all students who are involved with administrative duties (www.bps.hu.nl) for quickly sharing knowledge and information with student members of other consultation bodies. Apart from a great deal of administrative experience, you also receive a payment of €40 for each meeting, although the level of financial recompense for administrative activities is subject to a maximum limit. See the relevant regulations at www.reglementen.hu.nl. If you would like to become a member of one or more of the consultation bodies, then you can stand as a candidate at the next election (www.verkiezingen.hu.nl). You can put yourself forward as a candidate, or via a participation body – see Section 2.8.4. For questions about the Programme Committee, ask the secretarial office of your study programme, or send an e-mail to the coach for administrative participation by students (
[email protected]). For more information, go to www.bps.hu.nl.
8.13
Studium Generale
Studium Generale is a place for HU students who are looking for an extra challenge or greater depth, in addition to their regular studies. Under the leadership of motivated professionals, the Studium Generale programmes offer you the opportunity to examine and sharpen your entrepreneurial skills, academic development or social ideals. During debates about developments at the HU, higher education, and society, you will learn to substantiate your opinions and to construct sound arguments, while in the ‘HU Popprijs’, you will be able to demonstrate your musical qualities. In addition, we regularly organize challenging assignments for students who are willing to commit themselves to a current social theme, a local activity or organizations that are looking for innovative ideas. We highlight our activities in our monthly newsletter, and you can always find the latest news at www.studiumgenerale.hu.nl.
8.14
Student association
8.14.1
General
There is a bustling student life in Utrecht, shaped by all kinds of associations and student organizations. The best-known are the social organizations. There are also other types of association, such as those based around a particular ideology, as well as international and intercultural associations. And of course, students have their own sports and cultural associations. You can find an overview of all the associations at www.utrecht.studiestad.nl. The HU provides financial support to student associations, for structural and incidental activities. If you would like to know more about applying for a grant, and about the terms and conditions for eligibility for one, go to www.studentvoorzieningen.hu.nl, and look under ‘Geldzaken’ (financial matters). For the sake of clarity, study associations and student associations are not the same thing. The former are linked to your study programme. See Section 2.8.4.
8.14.2
Administrative grant
Administrative grant If you are on the board or a committee of a student association (either at the UU or the HU), then you may be eligible for an administrative grant. This is a payment that is intended to compensate for the delay in your studies that you incur as a result of your administrative activities, and which you receive separately from your performance-related grant. The student organizations and administrative functions that qualify for an administrative grant can be found in the Appendix to the Regulations pertaining to Administrative Grants for student administrators in UU/HU student organizations. See Chapter D of the HU Talent Grant (www.reglementen.hu.nl).
58/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014 For more information about the procedure, or to apply for an administrative grant, go to www.studentvoorzieningen.hu.nl, and look under ‘Profileringsfonds’ (Talent Grant).
8.15
Top-level sport
If you compete in a sport at a high level and you wish to study at the same time, you will be pleased to know that the HU offers a large number of facilities to students seeking to do so. Based on your individual circumstances and the level at which you compete, the HU will assess whether you can benefit from these facilities. You may be eligible for the following:
Assistance with planning your studies; If necessary, deferment of your exams; Collaboration with coaches, trainers, sports associations, Olympic support points and the Individual Guidance department of the Dutch Olympic Committee and the Dutch Sports Federation; The opportunity to use sports locations and sport-related medical assistance; Financial support if you fall behind in your studies.
For more information, contact the HU top-level sports coordinator, Mieke Wikkerman (
[email protected]) or (088) 481 51 26), or your student counsellor (see Section 8.2), or go to www.topsport.hu.nl.
8.16
Trajectum
Trajectum is the independent magazine at the HU and appears every two weeks. It contains articles about students, studying, student life, education and research, the city of Utrecht, and culture. There are contributions by students and lecturers alike. Every day, you will find news, competitions, films, blogs by students and lecturers, and practical information on the www.trajectum.hu.nl website. You can also follow Trajectum on Facebook and Twitter.
8.17
Sports
For student prices, you can do sports at Olympos, the HU and Utrecht University sports centre. Olympos has a wide range of fitness, ball, dancing, combat, and racquet sports. Go to www.olympos.nl for detailed information about what is available, dates, and prices. See Article 42 of the Student Charter (www.reglementen.hu.nl).
8.18
Safe, healthy, and environmentally-friendly study
The HU attaches much importance to safe, healthy, and pleasant learning and working surroundings, as well as to the environment and careful use of energy. It aims to guarantee your health and safety by reducing, to an acceptable level, the risks associated with conditions in the workplace. For that reason, every HU faculty and service department has a Health, Safety and Environmental Committee that acts as the point of contact for these matters, and which coordinates the implementation of the relevant policies in the faculties. Of course, you too share some of the responsibility for health, safety and the environment. How can you contribute towards health and safety? You are expected to cooperate in creating and maintaining healthy, safe and environmentally-friendly surroundings at the HU. Areas of focus are:
knowing what to do in the event of a fire, accident, or other emergencies (see below); preventing CANS (RSI) awareness of the environment, by not printing documents unnecessarily and by recycling coffee cups.
Below is more information on these matters. What should you do in the event of fire, an accident, or other emergency?
59/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014 You should be aware of what to do in the event of a fire, emergency, or a report of an accident (see below), and you should know where the emergency exit routes and emergency exits are. Emergency exit routes and exits are shown on the floor layouts in the building. Instructions on what to do in the event of an emergency are posted in every room. Never call the fire brigade, police, or an ambulance yourself. Instead, phone the internal alarm number immediately 3999; you will be connected to an employee of the main faculty or site reception desk. Give the following information – clearly and succinctly:
Your name and classroom / location; Your telephone number; The current situation (how, what, where); Whether there are any casualties, and how many; Where it has occurred.
The employee will alert a First Aid worker or, in the event of a major emergency, the head of the internal emergency response team. Remain calm at all times, warn everyone around you who is in danger, and wait till help arrives. Internal emergency response team and First Aid Every location has an internal emergency response team that can be deployed in the event of a fire, accident or other emergency. The members of the team can be identified during an emergency by the coloured tabards bearing the text ‘BHV’er’. Always strictly follow their instructions during a fire, accident, or other emergency. Do not use lifts when evacuating the building. Remain outside at the assembly point designated by the internal emergency response team member and await further instructions. Always keep space free for fire engines and ambulances. Never leave the area without letting somebody know: this will prevent searches being conducted unnecessarily. Studying and CANS (RSI) “It seems as if I am having more and more problems with my neck.” Perhaps you have pain in your arm, shoulder, elbow, or wrist. At first, you think it will pass of its own accord, but unfortunately this is not always the case. This is because this type of pain could be a sign that you have CANS (Complaints of Arm, Neck and/or Shoulder), which used to be known as RSI. It can affect anyone. If you do not take the first signals seriously, the complaints may spread. CANS can be caused by:
Repetitive work; A static work posture; Not changing your work posture enough, and too little exercise; Not sitting properly (information on how to sit properly can be found in the HU’s ‘Geef CANS geen KANS’ leaflet); Stress, especially at busy times (exams, or when writing your thesis).
While studying, you sometimes spend a long time working in the same position or making the same movements again and again. For example, you regularly work long hours at your computer, at home as well as at school. Then, there are the times you spend on the internet and playing computer games. You can largely prevent CANS yourself. The most important tips are:
Vary working at a computer screen with reading, making notes, etc.; Do not work for more than five to six hours a day at a computer screen (standard desk top) and no longer than two hours with a laptop; If you must use a laptop for more than two hours, use a laptop stand, with a separate keyboard and separate mouse; Take a short break every hour, when working at a computer screen; Make sure you sit properly when working at a computer screen; Make sure you get enough relaxation and exercise in addition to your studies; Take physical complaints seriously. Emerging symptoms (pain, tingling feelings, stiffness) can quickly get worse.
60/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
If you have CANS symptoms, you can go to your study progress advisor or student counsellor, or to the health and safety advisor in your faculty (see www.arboenmilieu.hu.nl). If your complaints have reached the stage where they are serious enough to require the attention of a doctor, go to your own GP. (See Section 8.8 about studying with a functional limitation.) Environment The faculty is environmentally aware. This means using water and energy sparingly, producing less waste, and separating waste properly. You can do your bit by:
not turning lights on when it is light enough; turning the lights out when you leave a room; not wasting any water and by using the ‘small’ flush option on the toilet (if there is one); not opening the window when it is warm, but instead turning down the heating; by turning off your computer and screen when you have finished work; by putting waste (batteries, paper, food leftovers) in the appropriate containers, including in the canteen; by keeping the building clean and not leaving litter lying around; by not smoking in the building. In any case, this is forbidden.
More specific information about health, safety, and the environment, and about arranging your computer workspace correctly can be found on the HU health, safety and environment website: https://www.sharepoint.hu.nl/sites/Arbo_Milieu/default.aspx. For questions, comments or ideas on health, safety and environment-related matters, contact the Health, Safety and Environment Committee in your faculty, or the HU Health, Safety, and Environment Team. For more information, go to: www.arboenmilieu.hu.nl
8.19
Insurance cover: liability, accident, and travel
You are liable for the financial and other consequences of accidents and damage caused to third parties. You can cover yourself by taking out liability insurance for private citizens. For accidents/death and legal liability while in or on your way to faculty buildings, the HU has limited insurance cover. This also includes activities relating to your studies that occur outside HU locations (but in the Netherlands), as well as activities relating to HU education abroad. If you cause any damage during your internship, then any claims will be made using the liability insurance of the company or organization that is providing the internship. If this does not provide any cover, then the claim will be made through your insurance. If neither policy offers cover, then the HU insurance will be used. If you are going to study abroad (as part of your programme at the HU), then you should arrange supplementary insurance. You are obliged to register your stay abroad before you leave, so it is good to know that by registering you are automatically covered by the free HU travel insurance policy. For more information about registering and the free travel insurance, go to www.gratisverzekerd.hu.nl.
8.20
Having a job while studying
If you are looking for a job that is relevant to your studies, the place to go in and around Utrecht is Campus Recruitment. Here, you can get personal career advice, have your CV polished up, and most importantly, an interesting job (part-time or otherwise) for which a lack of experience is not a problem. Go to www.campusrecruitment.eu. You can also contact knowledge centres where students can jointly carry out applied research under the leadership of a professor, or work on product innovations.
61/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014 In addition to your student grant, you are allowed to earn a limited amount per calendar year without affecting your right to the grant. The limit can be found on the DUO (Dienst Uitvoering op Onderwijs) website, www.ocwduo.nl, and applies to everyone who is entitled to a student grant. If you work so much that you fall behind in your studies, then it is often more sensible to borrow money from the DUO. Your student counsellor can advise you on this. (See Section 8.2.)
8.21
Accommodation
Finding a good and affordable room in Utrecht is not easy. Remember that the market will be extra busy in the summer months. Register with www.kamersinutrecht.nl, www.kamernodig.nl, www.woningnet.nl, or the Student Housing Foundation (SSH). If you have found somewhere to live and you have moved, then register with the local authority. One reason why this is necessary is to show to the DUO that you are not living with your parents. You can register at the Dienst Burgerzaken (civil affairs department), and must do so within five days of moving. Take a valid identity document with you. You should also inform the HU of any change of address; use OSIRIS to do this. See Section 2.8.2.4 of this Study Guide. Alternatively, you can use Studielink.
62/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
9
About the HU
This chapter contains more information about the Hogeschool Utrecht.
9.1
General information
You are studying at the Hogeschool Utrecht. With more than 38,000 students and 3,400 employees, the HU is one of the larger HBO institutions in the Netherlands, offering a wide range of study programmes spread over six faculties. The more than eighty Bachelor’s programmes provide learning in the fields of communication and journalism, economics and management, nature and technology, healthcare, education, and society and law, in both Utrecht and Amersfoort. The HU also runs Master’s programmes, from which you can gain a Master’s degree in various fields. The scale of the HU means we are both large and small: we organize teaching for each study programme separately, which makes things clearer and more personal for you, the students. At the same time, our large scale enables us to offer you more than just a study programme. You can, for example, take part in educational activities of other HU study programmes, or indeed at other educational establishments elsewhere in the Netherlands or abroad. Examples that come to mind are a minor or internship.
9.1.1
Education profile of the HU
Higher Vocational Education in the knowledge society No two colleges are alike. Like other institutions, the HU has to make careful choices with regard to its education profile. Through our teaching, we seek to contribute towards a sustainable knowledge society. We organize our teaching in a way that enables you, the student, to develop to the maximum possible degree. We therefore believe it is very important that you feel at home here, and the work we do is aimed at that goal. HU has other tasks in addition to providing education. For example, we invest in research that is embedded in knowledge centres. This means we not only train professionals, but also contribute towards innovating the environment in which professionals operate. That is why the HU is strongly oriented towards social, economic, and societal issues, and this is something you will encounter in our teaching. So with regard to our education profile, the above has led us to deliberately opt for competency and demand-driven teaching, ensuring that students are able to study in a robust study environment. We have set out below what exactly this means. Competency-oriented teaching Teaching is competency-oriented when you, the student, acquire the knowledge, skills, and attitude that you need to practise a particular profession. The study programmes formulate, reinforce, and bring up to date the competencies in close consultation with those in the professional field. Competency-oriented teaching also means that we provide ‘customized’ teaching. We use competencies that you already possess as a springboard, we encourage you to take an increasingly greater control of your own learning process, to make choices and to justify them. You have to be able to act professionally in typical professional situations of increasing complexity. We also challenge you to develop your research skills and your competencies in an international and multicultural environment. Demand-driven teaching Our teaching is aimed at both demand from the professional field and demand on the part of the students. We match your knowledge and learning needs with that of the field in a way that meets the quality requirements of the study programme. We believe that you yourself are responsible for your study progress and that the task of the HU is to support you in that process. You have opportunities for structuring your studies according to your own wishes. A robust learning environment 63/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014 A competency-oriented and demand-driven study programme requires a robust learning environment – an environment that inspires and challenges you, and enables you to push the limits of your abilities, again and again. It is an environment in which learning is shaped through practice-based work: to learn is to work, and to work is to learn. If need be, the learning environment has an international orientation. Every study programme has a knowledge base, laid down with the help of professionals in the field. From the very first year, the acquisition of knowledge and skills based on realistic professional tasks is key. The teaching consists of a variety of methods, both individual and in collaboration with you and your fellow students, with an ever-greater emphasis on authentic professional situations.
9.1.2
Bachelor’s and Master’s system
Hogeschool Utrecht operates as part of the Dutch education system. This means that a series of structural factors, such as the duration of the study programmes, are determined by law. Because there are two types of study programme Bachelor’s and Master’s - in higher education (HBO and WO), the term ‘Bachelor’s-Master’s system’ is sometimes used. Bachelor’s-Master’s system Education at universities (both HBO and WO) is divided into two phases, the Bachelor’s phase and the Master’s phase. 4 A four-year HBO study programme is called a Bachelor’s study programme , upon completion of which you receive a Bachelor’s degree. You can obtain a Bachelor’s diploma in three years at university. After that, you can continue studying for a Master’s diploma. Both HBO and WO universities offer Master’s study programmes. If you are studying at an HBO university, you may be entitled to a grant, although this is not the case for those studying part-time. For more information on student grants, see the DUO website, (www.ocwduo.nl). Bachelor’s study programmes The Bachelor’s diploma is internationally recognized, which is useful if you wish to work abroad. In most cases, you can also spend some time abroad as part of your study programme. The Bachelor’s study programmes at the HU also have many optional subjects. You can choose a minor (a cohesive package of optional courses) or a package of optional courses that you put together yourself. For more details, see Section 2.5.4 (optional subjects component). The optional subjects component also means that you can study some study components at other universities, both inside and outside the Netherlands. Master’s study programmes After completing your Bachelor’s programme, you can go on to do a Master’s programme at a university (HBO or WO). The HU has a growing number of Master’s programmes, including for people with several years’ work experience. For more information, go to www.masters.hu.nl. If you would like to do a Master’s at a WO university, you should know that there are sometimes gaps between HBO qualifications and the requirements for embarking on a Master’s at a WO university. In order to bring your knowledge and skills to the required level, special courses have been devised for a number of Master’s , known as pre-Master’s. You take them before starting on the Master’s proper. For more information, go to www.premasters.hu.nl, or consult the brochure entitled, ‘Doorstuderen na je bachelor aan de UU’.
9.1.3
HU and faculty regulations
HU and faculty regulations Under the terms of the Higher Education and Research Act, the HU, as an institute for Higher Vocational Education, has a number of obligations. These have been incorporated by the HU into various regulations and set out in more detail.
4
The period of four years is for the full-time version. In the case of part-time and dual programmes, the period may be different.
64/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014 There are regulations that apply to all students at the HU, which can be found at www.reglementen.hu.nl. In addition, there are regulations that apply only to students in a particular faculty or who are on a specific study programme. These regulations can be found on the SharePoint site of your faculty or study programme. Regulations that apply to all at the HU The most important HU-wide regulations for you are those in the ‘Student and Teaching’ and ‘Participation’ categories. Examples are: -
-
-
-
The HU Student Charter: Your general rights and obligations as a student; The HU Teaching and Examination Regulations: These set out your rights and obligations as a student with regard to teaching, exams, and other related matters; The Enrolment Regulations: These describe the procedural aspects of enrolment, tuition fees, and unenrolment. See Section 9.2.7; The HU Legal Protection for Students Regulations: These describe the steps you can take if you do not agree with something. See Chapter 7 and www.klachtenwegwijzer.hu.nl; The Talent Grant: The different types of financial support that HU can provide you with are set out here. See Section 8.2; Programme Committee Regulations: These cover everything related to the Programme Committee (departmental level advisory bodies). See Section 8.12.1; Regulations on Undesirable Behaviour: These set out the rules of conduct at the HU. IT Code of Conduct This describes the rules of conduct in relation to the use of computers and the HU network.
The most up-to-date versions of the regulations can be found at www.reglementen.hu.nl. The most important regulations for students, including the Teaching and Examination Regulations and this Study Guide, are revised every year. The new versions replace the old versions, which then cease to be valid. If it is necessary to maintain old rules, a transitional arrangement will apply, stating for whom and until when certain old rules shall apply. The HU Teaching and Examination Regulations for Bachelor’s programmes and the Study Guide for a particular academic year apply to every student who has enrolled for that academic year. Faculty and study programme regulations You can find faculty regulations via the SharePoint site of your study programme. Examples include house rules, exam protocols, and other matters that only apply to students in the faculty in question. Chapter 10 of the HU Teaching and Examination Regulations for Bachelor’s programmes also contains rules that apply to every student in the faculty concerned. Chapter 10 of the same regulations for your faculty can be found at www.reglementen.hu.nl. The HU Teaching and Examination Regulations are set out in greater detail in the Study Guide in the form of rules relating to study programmes – these apply to students on the relevant programme. All the HU Study Guides can be found at www.studiegidsen.hu.nl.
9.1.4
Rules governing order
Article 48 of the Student Charter (see www.reglementen.hu.nl) regulates the maintenance of order at the HU. Briefly, it entails the following: Provisions and instructions In order to maintain order, provisions and instructions that have been laid down by or on behalf of the Executive Board and faculty management apply at the HU, in addition to the law in general. They relate to, but are not limited to, the following topics:
Undesirable behaviour; 65/189
© Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Fraud and irregularities during exams (see Section 4.4.2); The use of the buildings and grounds and their facilities; Reporting of absence by students as a result of illness or other causes; Exceptional circumstances.
Clothing that covers the face is banned at the HU. Study programmes may impose additional clothing-related rules if this is considered necessary on account of the practical nature of the lessons. Obligations of students As a student, you have the following obligations on the basis of the Working Conditions Act:
The obligation to act carefully and cautiously when working and studying; The obligation to be familiar with safety and other regulations that relate to your work and studies; The obligation to use safety provisions correctly and to wear or apply compulsory protection equipment; The obligation to report unsafe or unhealthy work situations to the relevant faculty management.
Sanctions If you are in breach of any of the provisions or instructions, or if you fail to fulfil your obligations, the faculty management may impose the following sanctions:
The issuing of a warning or reprimand; Denial of access to the buildings and grounds of the HU for a period not exceeding one year; Termination of your enrolment.
Your enrolment as a student at the HU may also be refused or terminated. This will occur if you show by your words or your actions that you are not fit for the profession for which you are being trained, or are unsuitable for the practical preparations that the training involves. If you are guilty of any irregularities, the Board of Examiners may also impose sanctions. It may decide, for example, that you may not take any exams for a certain amount of time, and it can also withhold your diploma. The Board can also advise your faculty director to terminate your enrolment permanently. The sanctions available to the Board of Examiners are described in greater detail in Section 4.4.2 of this Study Guide and in Article 38 of the HU Teaching and Examination Regulations for Bachelor’s programmes 2012-2013.
9.1.5
Quality assurance
The HU devotes a great deal of care and attention to quality. Quality assurance relates, among other things, to every aspect of teaching, the curriculum, study progress, supervision, the organization of teaching, and the relationship between the study programme and the employment market. The system of quality assurance used by the programme is described in precise detail in the quality plan. This describes how a clearer idea of the quality of the programmes is obtained, how things might be improved, how you are involved with the evaluation of the quality of teaching, and how the results of the evaluations are reported. Programme Committees play an important role in the system of quality assurance and are responsible for bringing about major improvements. The quality of teaching is of course best evaluated by you and your fellow students. You will therefore be approached on a regular basis to complete anonymous questionnaires in which you can give your evaluations.
9.1.6
HU organizational chart
An organizational chart of the HU is shown at www.hu.nl/overdeHU. Click on ‘In het kort’ and then on ‘Organogram'
66/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014 Teaching at the HU is organized in institutes, academies, and centres. The Bachelor’s programmes are provided by the institutes. Institutes are groups of lecturers who are each responsible for one or more study programmes. Knowledge centres are groups of professors who are responsible for the implementation of research programmes. The HU is organized into faculties. See Section 9.1.7.
9.1.7
HU locations
HU locations in Utrecht and Amersfoort The addresses and route descriptions for all locations in Utrecht and Amersfoort are on www.hu.nl/adressen. For those using public transport, go to www.9292ov.nl.
9.2
General information on the faculty of Communication and Journalism
9.2.1
General
The departments of Communication and Media are subdivisions of the Faculty Communication & Journalism (HU). (Utrecht University of Professional Education). The Faculty Communication & Journalism (FCJ) is the largest faculty in the field of (digital) communication and journalism and forms a centre of knowledge and expertise within its fields of study. Thus the FCJ offers a shared platform of high quality education. The faculty stimulates a knowledge exchange between practice and theory. The knowledge centre of the faculty is the home base of lectureships within the fields of Government Communication and Crossmedia content. First goal of the FCJ is to provide in a professional training which offers immediate access to the professional occupation. These bachelor‟s programmes also offer the possibility to move on to master‟s programmes at universities or higher professional education institutions. The Centre of Communication & Journalism offers the expertise of both internal and external professionals. Through professional custom education practice and theory meet for among others refresher courses and post-graduate courses within the field of profession.
9.2.2
Organizational chart of the faculty
An organizational chart of the faculty is available at Sharepoint.
9.2.3
Contact information
International Communication & Media, Faculty of Communication and Journalism (HU) Padualaan 99 3584 CH Utrecht Telefoon: 088- 48130 00
9.2.4
Map
A floorplan is available at Sharepoint
67/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
9.2.5
Practical provisions and instructions
Within the faculty the following practical rules apply: -
5
-
-
You have to be able to prove your identity with a valid identity document ; Mobile phones must be switched off during lectures. Students that arrive late may be refused entry into the classroom. Smoking is forbidden in the entire building. It is not permitted to cycle, (roller) skate and skateboard in the building. Bringing pets into the building is not allowed. Litter must be deposited in the appropriate litter bins. It is not allowed to take faculty property from the building without permission in writing. The hanging of posters is only allowed on the appropriate notice boards. In case of an emergency the following emergency number should be rung: 088 481 39 99. For the protection of the computer network it is not allowed to use software from outside on the system. This also applies to software which is downloaded through a network. The use of alcohol in and around the building is prohibited, except in the cafe at certain hours. It is forbidden to make copies of teaching materials of which the copy right rests with the course/FCJ/Hogeschool Utrecht. This prohibition also applies to software which is used under licence by the course/FCJ/Hogeschool Utrecht. Students are not allowed to make use of the lift without permission.
In addition to the rules mentioned above the management of the faculty can give further practical directions.
9.2.6
Facilities
FCJ Faculty Education Office You can find the desk of the Faculty Education Office (FBO) in room 1S120. It is the central information service for all your questions on curriculum and teaching issues. You can also log on to computers to check your grades in Osiris or look for information on the intranet. See paragraph 1.3.5 for office hours.
Xerox Reproshop On the ground floor, in the OS corridor, you can find the Facility Shop. The shop can help you with: making photocopies for teachers; binding reports and providing readers Office hours Monday
9 am - 12.30 noon, 1 pm – 5 pm
Tuesday
9 am - 12.30 noon, 1 pm – 5 pm
Wednesday
9 am - 12.30 noon, 1 pm – 5 pm
Thursday
9 am - 12.30 noon, 1 pm – 5 pm
Friday
9 am - 12.30 noon, 1 pm – 5 pm
How can I report a complaint, a problem or make a request? You can always put your (additional) questions to the Central Support & Complaints Centre (Centraal 5
A passport, European identity card, Dutch or international driving licence or refugee document
68/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014 Facilitair Meldpunt). You can contact the centre for all your questions by email:
[email protected], or by phone: 6666. AV/IT desk Problems with a computer, printer or telephone? The AV/IT desk is at the back of the OS corridor on the left side, in room OS133. Opening hours: Monday to Thursday Friday
8 am – 7 pm 8 am – 5 pm
Wireless consultation hour: Monday, Tuesday and Thursday
11 am- 1 pm
Restaurant The restaurant has a broad assortment of hot snacks, soup, bread and sandwich fillings and hot and cold drinks. Hot meals are served in the evening, except on Friday. Opening hours: Monday to Thursday Friday
10 am – 7 pm 10 am – 3 pm
Stef’s Cafe After 2.30 pm alcohol is served in the cafe from Monday to Friday. Opening hours: Monday to Thursday Friday
8 am – 9 pm 10 am – 6 pm
Smoking policy There is a general smoking ban within the faculty. Chipcard All payments at the faculty are done by means of the chip card (on your bank card), which means that you pay everywhere using the rfid chip on your debit card. On the ground floor there are two machines for recharging your card. Stef‟s cafe is the only place where you can both use your chip card and pay in cash. Next to that you can pay with your debit card at the Facility Shop.
9.2.7
Enrolment for and unenrolling from the study programme
Enrolments Office The Enrolments Office is responsible for enrolling and unenrolling students at the HU, for collecting tuition fees, and for issuing student identity cards. Enrolment You may enrol as a student for a study programme if you fulfil the following conditions: You meet the admission requirements (see Sections 9.2.8 and 2.5.1); You have paid your tuition fees (or if payment has been arranged by a standing order or letter of guarantee); You meet the other requirements, as stated in the HU Enrolment Regulations (see www.reglementen.hu.nl). You may only use the services and facilities of the HU when you have officially enrolled.
69/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014 If you have successfully completed a preliminary year for an HBO or WO study programme, you may be able to enter the study programme at a more advanced stage of the programme. In that case, you will be exempt from the preliminary year subjects. If you wish to enrol for the main stage, you can use www.studielink.nl, but you should first contact the study programme. They will be able to tell you more about your options and determine whether you meet the requirements for being able to enter the main stage of the programme. Re-enrolment You must re-enrol in every academic year. You can arrange this and payment of your tuition fees online, via Studielink www.hu.studielink.nl. Before the start of a new year (in around June), you will receive a message from the Enrolments Office on how to re-enrol. If you have received a negative recommendation on the continuation of your studies (see Section 2.4.2) at the end of the academic year, you may not re-enrol for the same study programme (and in some cases, not for related programmes either) at the HU in the following academic year. Student identity card and proof of enrolment When your enrolment or re-enrolment process has been completed, you will receive a student identity card and proof of enrolment. Your student identity card also serves as proof of enrolment. Termination of enrolment If you do not re-enrol for the new academic year, your enrolment will end on 1 September. This is expected to change in the future. In that case, you will enrol once, and remain enrolled until you unenrol via Studielink. If your enrolment ends, then you will no longer be entitled to a student grant or your student public transport pass. You may also request that your enrolment be terminated during the academic year. This will then take effect from the first following month. Even if you have graduated, you still need to unenrol yourself, using Studielink. You can unenrol with effect from the first month that follows the month in which your diploma is issued. Please note! The unenrolment date is important for the purpose of getting back any tuition fees that may be owed to you. For more information about possible reimbursement of tuition fees when unenrolling, see the HU Enrolment Regulations at www.reglementen.hu.nl. Finally, your enrolment may be terminated if you have not paid your tuition fees after receiving a reminder. It will then be terminated with effect from the second month following the reminder. The above information is just a summary. The procedures are described in full in the HU Enrolment Regulations (see www.reglementen.hu.nl). For more information about enrolling and unenrolling, go to the Enrolments Office website: www.inschrijven.hu.nl.
9.2.8
Admission test
If you do not have the correct prior educational qualifications for the study programme and you are 21 or over, then you will have to take part in the programme’s admission test 21+ in order to be able to join the programme. The admission test consists of three or four exams and an intake interview. The purpose of the admission test is to enable us to determine whether your knowledge, understanding and language skills make you suitable for higher vocational education. The knowledge level that you will be tested on is that of the HAVO final exam. The admission test is also called the colloquium doctum. A student without the required certificates mentioned under point 2 below who has not passed the TOEFL with at least a score of 550 (paper-based) or 213 (computer based) (or a similar test, such as IELTS), is considered to have a deficiency in his previous education. Such a student should first obtain the requisite TOEFL score or a similar certificate to be admitted to ICM.
70/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014 2
VWO or HAVO (GCSE) second phase certificates can be admitted with the subjects clusters mentioned below. Students with an MBO level 4 certificate will be admitted with all subjects clusters. Subjects cluster Nature and technique Nature and health Culture and society Economics and society
3.
HAVO New Style * * Mathematics A or B required *
VWO * * * *
Equivalent previous education with foreign diplomas: German Abitur with one of the subjects mentioned above; International Baccalaureate with one of the subjects mentioned above; 6 British GCSEs with A, B or C scores and with one of the subjects mentioned above; French Baccalaureate with one of the subjects mentioned above; Other foreign diplomas which have been approved by the Nuffic and with one of the subjects mentioned above.
If you do not have the proper preliminary training and you are 21 years old or older, you have to do an entrance exam 21+ of the course you want to do at the HU in order to be accepted. The entrance exam consists of three of four tests and an interview. The purpose of the exam is to find out if you are eligible for higher professional education with respect to knowledge, insight and linguistic skills. The level of knowledge tested is the HAVO school examination (GCSE-level). More information is to be found on: www.toelatingsonderzoek.hu.nl.
9.2.9
Study costs, supplementary fees, and rebates
Education at the HU costs money.
9.2.9.1 Tuition fees Your situation determines whether you pay statutory tuition fees or institutional tuition fees. In general, the rules are as follows. You pay statutory tuition fees if:
You are not already in possession of a Bachelor’s or Master’s degree. This does not apply if you intend to start a study programme in the field of healthcare or education, unless your previous degree was in either of these fields; You live in the Netherlands, Belgium, Luxembourg or in the German Länder of North Rhine-Westphalia, Lower Saxony or Bremen and; You are of Dutch nationality or equivalent (in accordance with Article 2.2 of the Student Grant Act 2000).
For the 2012-2013 academic year, the tuition fees are as follows:
€1.835 for full-time students; €1.835 for dual students; €1.508 for part-time students; €1.649 for part-time students who are taking a government-funded Master’s at the FE or the FMR.
The institutional tuition fees for the 2013-2014 academic year are:
€7.747 for full-time students; 71/189
© Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
€7.747 for dual students; €6.363 for part-time students; €6.960 for part-time students who are taking a government-funded Master’s.
If you were taking two Bachelor’s programmes in 2011-2012, then the fees are different (see below). If you have to go abroad as a compulsory part of your studies or for an internship (and as a result are unable to remain registered with the local city council), you are subject to institutional tuition fees which are set at the same level as statutory tuition fees. Two Bachelor’s programme at the same time If you were enrolled on two Bachelor’s programmes in the 2011-2012 academic year or earlier, or if you are going to enrol on a second Bachelor’s programme in 2013-2014, then you fall under a different arrangement. If you have obtained your degree for the first programme and are aiming to complete the second one, you will have to pay institutional tuition fees (unless your degree is in the healthcare or education fields). On the basis of an agreement between HBO institutions and the Ministry, you will be liable to pay institutional tuitions fees for 2012-2013 and 20132014 that have been set at the same level as statutory tuition fees.
Two Bachelor’s programmes in succession Legislation was drastically revised with effect from 1 September 2010. One important change is the law whereby the Ministry of Education, Culture and Science only funds one Bachelor’s and one Master’s, with no distinction being made between HBO and WO degrees. If you have already obtained a Bachelor’s or Master’s degree (unless it was before 1991-1992) and you wish to enrol, or if you already have a degree and are now enrolled for a second Bachelor’s or Master’s programme, then you come under the category known as ‘stapelaars’. For their second Bachelor’s or Master’s programme, they do not pay statutory tuition fees, but institutional tuition fees. The government has made an exception for those taking a programme in healthcare or education, but only if the first degree was not in either of these fields. Institutional tuition fees are considerably higher than their statutory counterparts, because the HU no longer receives any government support for students who take a second Bachelor’s or Master’s programme. However, the HU has decided to introduce the increase in tuition fees gradually for ‘stapelaars’ who were already enrolled before the 2010-2011 academic year on a programme at the HU and who have not interrupted their studies since then. In 2011-2012, you pay 50% of the institutional tuition fees, and in 2012-2013 you will pay the full amount. Tuition fees are in some cases tax deductible (www.belastingdienst.nl). If you work, then ask your employer about the options. Enrolling as an external student Examination fees for external students have been set by the HU at €1,771. This type of enrolment is for students who are only taking exams and who do not need any supervision or support. External students may not attend lessons; they only take exams. It is not always possible to enrol as an external student. For this programme, a student may not enrol as an external student.. Increase in tuition fees for students who have fallen behind in their studies From the 2012-2013 academic year, statutory tuition fees will be increased for students who are more than a year behind schedule with their studies. After the regular duration of a Bachelor’s and a Master’s, you have one more year in which you pay the standard statutory tuition fees. Note: previous enrolments on other similar Higher Education programmes (from 1991 onwards) will count towards the calculation of the duration of your enrolment. When you have ‘used up’ your ‘extra year’, you will start to pay the higher rate of statutory tuition fees – that is, the normal statutory fees plus a supplement of €3,063, which is indexed every year by the Ministry of Education, Culture and Science. If you are awarded an extra year’s grant, you will also be given an extra year for your studies.
72/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
9.2.9.2 Costs of books and learning materials Costs of books and learning materials For books and other school materials, you should budget approximately 750 Euros a year.
9.2.9.3 Other costs You will need about 600 Euros every month to cover rent, food, insurance, transport and other expenses. This does not cover study expenses.
9.2.9.4 Financial assistance If you are no longer able to bear the costs for certain educational facilities on account of demonstrable financial reasons, you may be eligible for financial assistance. You should submit such a request to the faculty management. The HU provides financial support for students who have fallen behind schedule with their studies for exceptional reasons. These could be related to administrative acitivites or other exceptional circumstances. To obtain financial support in relation to exceptional circumstances, you must apply through your student counsellor. For more information, see the HU Talent Grant or go to www.studentvoorzieningen.hu.nl. For financial support for students involved in administrative activities, see Section 8.14.2.
.
73/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
10
Course descriptions
Titel
Administration
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen:
JIC-ADMSTR.3V-12 Administration Administration 1 European Credits B (bachelor hoofdfase) Nee
D Licina (tel. 3463) (
[email protected]) Engels
Werkvorm
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Diverse werkvormen
niet verplicht
1.11
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Frequentie
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok JAAR: blok JAAR
Toetsen:
Toetsvorm
Resultaatschaal
Minimum cijfer
Opdracht
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden?
100
1
bij aanvangsblok JAAR: 1. blok JAAR
74/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1
Korte beschrijving
2.2
Learning outcomes
2.3
Kennisbasis
2.4 Geen
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
2.5 Geen kosten
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): Toetsduur (uren): Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 0 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
75/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Applied research
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen: Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Werkvorm
Practical research skills
niet verplicht
Quantitative research skills
SPSS
1.11
niet verplicht
niet verplicht
JIC-APP.1V-11 Applied research Applied research 5 European Credits D (propedeuse) Nee
RCA Versmissen (tel. 3439) (
[email protected]) Engels
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Frequentie
1 maal per week
1 maal per week
1 maal per week
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden?
1260 minuten
bij aanvangsblok 3: blok 3 bij aanvangsblok 4: blok 4
1260 minuten
bij aanvangsblok 3: blok 3 bij aanvangsblok 4: blok 4
1260 minuten
bij aanvangsblok 3: blok 3 bij aanvangsblok 4: blok 4
Toetsen:
Toetsvorm
Resultaatschaal
Minimum cijfer
Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden?
Practical research assignment
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
50
3
bij aanvangsblok 3: 1. blok 3, week 6 bij aanvangsblok 4: 1. blok 4, week 16 2. blok 5, week 27
Quantitative research exam
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
50
3
bij aanvangsblok 3: 1. blok 3, week 6 bij aanvangsblok 4:
76/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
1. blok 4, week 16 2. blok 5, week 27
77/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1
Korte beschrijving
After this course students should be able to: - Identify and formulate a research problem - Formulate research questions that will assist in solving the research problem - Find relevant literature to collect information that relates to the research problem - Select a suitable research design - Collect the data for the research - Analyse the collected data (quantitatively and qualitatively) - Write a research plan - Present the research findings 2.2
Learning outcomes
2.3
Kennisbasis
The student has the skills to identify and analyse an organisational problem related to communication. The student is able to find, evaluate and apply literature related to a research problem. The student has the skills to develop data collection tools, collect qualitative and quantitative data, analyse and present data. The student is able to develop a research plan.
2.4 Geen
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
2.5 Geen kosten
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 63 Toetsduur (uren): 2 Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 65 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
78/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Applied Research
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden?
1.6 1.7 1.8
Contactpersoon
1.9 1.10
Voertaal Werkvormen:
JIC-APRES.3V-09 Applied Research Applied Research 5 European Credits B (bachelor hoofdfase) Nee
E Bekooij-Westerhoudt (tel. 3155) (
[email protected]) Engels
Werkvorm
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Frequentie
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Werkcollege
niet verplicht
1 maal per week
840 minuten
1.11
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 2: blok 2
Toetsen:
Toetsvorm
Resultaatschaal
Minimum cijfer
Opdracht
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
100
2
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 2: 1. blok 2, week 46 2. blok 3, week 6
79/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1
Korte beschrijving
Competence 2: Design, conduct, analyze and report an applied research based on a communication problem In order to develop a communication/media strategy, planning or product, it is necessary to do research. E.g. you will have to know what is in the mind of the public and target groups. This way you can make well founded choices. During and after a communication campaign or action you need to conduct research in order to find out whether your strategy and planning have reached the intended effects. You have developed your information literacy skills You will able to conduct analysis in a structured way Competence 8: Representing the organization You will be able to start a public debate about a topic of your interest You have the corresponding written communication skills You understand your own strengths and weaknesses in these skills You are familiar with the usual modus operandi in maintaining media contacts Competence 10: Professional attitude and behaviour The communication- and media professional should be able to communicate and interact in various situations and should keep in mind the context, the needs, demands and culture of his environment. He should be able to reflect on the profession in general and his personal behaviour and attitude in particular 2.2
Learning outcomes
2.3 Kennisbasis Every organisational entity engages in applied research. Applied research includes two conversion processes: the conversion of a practical and policy problem into a research methodology and the conversion of research outcomes into social and political reality. As a communication and media consultant you want to make sure your advice is well founded and useful for the organisation. From and through applied communication research you can make a difference. What knowledge is necessary for the realisation of business objectives? How do you start with your research? In what way can you access and analyse data? Which critical and creative thinking processes are necessary for your research? What research developments are useful for you and your organisation? These are the kind of questions we address during the course ‘Applied Research’. 2.4 Ingangseisen Geen Kosten en 2.5 studiematerialen Geen kosten 2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 14 Toetsduur (uren): Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 14 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
80/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Branding
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen:
JIC-BRAND.3V-09 Branding Branding 5 European Credits B (bachelor hoofdfase) Nee
M Banbersta (
[email protected]) Engels
Werkvorm
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Frequentie
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Werkcollege
niet verplicht
2 maal per week
1680 minuten
1.11
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 2: blok 2
Toetsen: Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden?
Toetsvorm
Resultaatschaal
Minimum cijfer
Opdracht
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
50
2
bij aanvangsblok 2: 1. blok 2, week 46 2. blok 3, week 6
Schriftelijk tentamen
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
50
2
bij aanvangsblok 2: 1. blok 2, week 46 2. blok 3, week 6
81/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1
Korte beschrijving
The student can explain and apply various branding theories on corporate, internal and product branding (1, 3 and 5) 2. The student understands the concept of brands and branding from an international and intercultural perspective (1) 3. The student can develop a new brand concept for an existing company, based on thorough research on the organisation, its competitors and the consumer trends in the specific market. (1, 2, 3 and 4) 4. The student can describe the brand based on the brand building blocks of Keller and gives advice on how to position the brand and implement the brand strategy (3, 4 and 5) The student uses theories on both corporate and product branding to explain their choices. 5. The student can create several brand names, make a well founded decision on the best name and designs a logo for the brand (7) 6. The student presents the plan both orally and on paper (6) 2.2
Learning outcomes
2.3
Kennisbasis
"A brand is a customer experience represented by a collection of images and ideas”. This definition of the American Marketing Association is mainly based on product- and service brands. This is one of the topics during this course but we also discuss Corporate Brands and Internal Branding and the way these three topics are connected to each other. During Branding you work on the following competences: Competence 3: Translate the organizational policies into communication policies • You are able to find relevant information about the organizational policies • You are able to align the communication branding policy to the organization policy • You can use the mission and vision of a company as common starting points for communication • You can develop brand values based on the common starting points for communication • You can work out different alternatives for the use of branding
•
You understand what brand equity is and can work with this concept
Entry Level
In order to be admitted to this course you will have to have knowledge and skills equal to: Finished all courses of the foundation year (60 EC). Finished at least 20 EC of the total of 50 EC compulsory courses in year 2; among these passed subjects should be JIC-MARCOM.2V-07, Marketing-Communication & JIC-CORPCO.2V-08; Corporate Communication 2.4 Ingangseisen Geen Kosten en 2.5 studiematerialen Geen kosten 2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 28 Toetsduur (uren): 2 Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 30 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 82/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2.7
Opmerkingen
2.8
URL cursussite
83/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Campaign plan
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen:
Werkvorm
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Werkcollege
1.11
niet verplicht
JIC-CAMPL.1V-11 Campaign plan Campaign plan 5 European Credits D (propedeuse) Nee
J Rovers (tel. 3521) (
[email protected]) Engels
Frequentie
1 maal per week
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
1260 minuten
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 1: blok 1 bij aanvangsblok 2: blok 2
Toetsen:
Toetsvorm
Campaign plan
Resultaatschaal
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
Minimum cijfer
5,5
Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
100
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
3
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 1: 1. blok 1, week 36 bij aanvangsblok 2: 1. blok 2, week 46 2. blok 3, week 6
84/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1 Korte beschrijving In the module Audience (in general) you will be working on the following competencies:
Research: Conduct target group analysis, media use analysis
Design: Make mood board Present pitch
Create: Create content for cross media Develop concept for media strategy (i.e. campaign plan) Working in a project
2.2
Professional attitude Learning outcomes
2.3
Kennisbasis
This is the Project of Module Audience in year 1. In this module, you will be working for a Creative Agency as a member of a junior creative team. Your client needs a campaign plan that helps them to promote among their target audience. The client made its briefing from its own perspective, this way of working is called an inside-out briefing. The managers of your client are very experienced and they are convinced that they know what is good, but they are not necessarily good at promoting. To them, communication means sending their message as clearly and as often as possible. You as a communication & media specialist know that this vision on communication (i.e.: communication = sending) is too limited and will not lead to an effective campaign, nor to an efficient deployment of media. You will need to find out what interests and motivates the target audience. You need to find out about their values, and their media use. As a junior creative team you and your fellow group members will develop a campaign plan to create awareness for and promote the client among the target audience. But before you can do so, you will need to rework the client’s briefing so that it gets a proper audience focus. For seven weeks, you will be working in a team of four juniors, guided by a coach who will act as a link between you and the client.
2.4 Geen
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
2.5 Geen kosten
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 21 Toetsduur (uren): Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 21 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
85/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Change Management
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen:
JIC-CHAMAN.3V-09 Change Management Change Management 5 European Credits B (bachelor hoofdfase) Nee
MJG Koopmans (
[email protected]) Engels
Werkvorm
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Frequentie
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Werkcollege
niet verplicht
2 maal per week
1680 minuten
1.11
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 2: blok 2
Toetsen: Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden?
Toetsvorm
Resultaatschaal
Minimum cijfer
Opdracht
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
50
2
bij aanvangsblok 2: 1. blok 2, week 46 2. blok 3, week 6
Schriftelijk tentamen
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
50
2
bij aanvangsblok 2: 1. blok 2, week 46 2. blok 3, week 6
86/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1 Korte beschrijving Competence 3: Translate the organizational policies into communication policies • You are able to find relevant information about the organizational changes • You are able to align the change communication policy to the organization policy • You know the basic theories on change management and you can see the role communication plays with change management. • You can work out different alternatives Competence 4: Write a tactical communication plan within the overall communication policy • You can link your plan to common starting points of the change • You can make a clear formulation of the target groups • You can draw up and control a budget • You can act as a sparing partner or member of the MT • You are able to monitor and adjust plans if necessary • You are able to evaluate the effects of the plan • You can show insight on the different stages of a communication plan (analyses, target groups, objectives, strategy, media, planning, budget and evaluation) • You can make choices have that are well founded 2.2 Learning outcomes 2.3
Kennisbasis
The environment of an organization constantly changes and influences not only the communication of the organization, but also the organizational policies. In the subject ‘Trends, issues and ethics’ your learned how to detect these changes in the environment. Now we are going to see, what impact it has on the organization. What kind of changes are there? How does the organization implement these changes and what role does the communication department play. Aims of the course: • You are able to find relevant information about the organizational changes • You are able to align the change communication policy to the organization policy • You know the basic theories on change management and you can see the role communication plays with change management. • You can work out different alternatives • You can link your plan to common starting points of the change • You can make a clear formulation of the target groups • You can draw up and control a budget • You can act as a sparing partner or member of the MT • You are able to monitor and adjust plans if necessary • You are able to evaluate the effects of the plan • You can show insight on the different stages of a communication plan (analyses target groups objectives strategy media planning budget and evaluation) • You can make choices have that are well founded Course content: It is often said that the only constant in most organizations nowadays is the fact that they change all the time. In this course you will gain insight in complex change process within international organizations and their effect on both the internal and external communication. Entry Level
In order to be admitted to this course you will have to have knowledge and skills equal to: Finished all courses of the foundation year (60 EC). 2.4 Ingangseisen Geen Kosten en 2.5 studiematerialen Geen kosten 2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 28 Toetsduur (uren): 2 Zelfstudie (uren):
87/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Totaal (uren): 30 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
88/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Chinese 1
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen:
1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
JIC-CHI1.2V-12 Chinese 1 Chinese for Beginners 5 European Credits B (bachelor hoofdfase) Nee
AAE Amoros - Espin (
[email protected]) Engels
Werkvorm
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Frequentie
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Diverse werkvormen
niet verplicht
2 maal per week
1680 minuten
1.11
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 1: blok 1, blok 2
Toetsen: Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden?
Toetsvorm
Resultaatschaal
Minimum cijfer
Assignment
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
40
2
bij aanvangsblok 1: 1. blok 2, week 46 2. blok 3, week 6
Exam
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
60
2
bij aanvangsblok 1: 1. blok 2, week 46 2. blok 3, week 6
89/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1 Korte beschrijving Course Goals and Learning Objectives Mandarin Chinese 1 and 2 Due to the nature of the Chinese language the level of proficiency at the end of Mandarin Chinese for Beginners 1 and 2 is that of a ‘basic user’ (= level A1) as described in the Common European Framework of Reference: http://www.languages.unimaas.nl/niveaus_common_european_framework_reference/CEF_English.htm Students can understand and use familiar everyday expressions and basic phrases aimed at the satisfaction of needs of a concrete type. Students will achieve a basic command of the language needed in a range of familiar situations, e.g. can read short simple texts, can communicate on familiar topics and handle short social exchanges and can write short simple notes and messages. (Common European Framework of Reference: level A1). 2.2 Learning outcomes 2.3
Kennisbasis
Mandarin Chinese for Beginners is a training course for basic Mandarin Chinese and an introduction to Chinese culture. We will focus on communication for everyday purposes in class. In this way the training course will help students get acquainted with the Chinese and their culture and will contribute to a better understanding of a country that is paying an increasing role in today’s world.
2.4 Geen
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
2.5 Geen kosten
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 28 Toetsduur (uren): 2 Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 30 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
90/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Chinese 2
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen:
1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
JIC-CHI2.2V-12 Chinese 2 Chinese 2 5 European Credits B (bachelor hoofdfase) Nee
AAE Amoros - Espin (
[email protected]) Engels
Werkvorm
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Frequentie
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Diverse werkvormen
verplicht
2 maal per week
3360 minuten
1.11
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 3: blok 3, blok 4
Toetsen: Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden?
Toetsvorm
Resultaatschaal
Minimum cijfer
Assignment
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
40
2
bij aanvangsblok 3: 1. blok 4, week 16 2. blok 5, week 27
Exam
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
60
2
bij aanvangsblok 3: 1. blok 4, week 16 2. blok 5, week 27
91/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1 Korte beschrijving Course Description Mandarin Chinese 2 Mandarin Chinese for Beginners is a training course for basic Mandarin Chinese and an introduction to Chinese culture. We will focus on communication for everyday purposes in class. In this way the training course will help students get acquainted with the Chinese and their culture and will contribute to a better understanding of a country that is paying an increasing role in today’s world. 2.2 Learning outcomes 2.3 Kennisbasis Course Goals and Learning Objectives Mandarin Chinese 1 and 2 Due to the nature of the Chinese language the level of proficiency at the end of Mandarin Chinese for Beginners 1 and 2 is that of a ‘basic user’ (= level A1) as described in the Common European Framework of Reference: http://www.languages.unimaas.nl/niveaus_common_european_framework_reference/CEF_English.htm Students can understand and use familiar everyday expressions and basic phrases aimed at the satisfaction of needs of a concrete type. Students will achieve a basic command of the language needed in a range of familiar situations, e.g. can read short simple texts, can communicate on familiar topics and handle short social exchanges and can write short simple notes and messages. (Common European Framework of Reference: level A1). Mandarin Chinese 2 is a follow-up of Mandarin Chinese 1. The course will consist of 2 parts: - Regular language classes (continuation of Mandarin Chinese 1) - Focus on Chinese media to get a little understanding of Chinese media by introducing songs, advertisements, television and film which will be loosely related to the module Media Research. In Block C the students will give a short presentation In Block D there will be an oral exam 2.4 Ingangseisen Geen Kosten en 2.5 studiematerialen Geen kosten 2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 56 Toetsduur (uren): 2 Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 58 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
92/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Change management
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen: Werkvorm
Change Management Lecture
Organisational Behaviour Lecture
Change Management Tutorial
Organisational Behaviour Tutorial
1.11
JIC-CHMAN.2V-13 Change management Change management 5 European Credits B (bachelor hoofdfase) Nee
RCA Versmissen (tel. 3439) (
[email protected]) Engels
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
niet verplicht
niet verplicht
niet verplicht
niet verplicht
Frequentie
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
1 maal per week
1 maal per week
1 maal per week
1 maal per week
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden?
840 minuten
bij aanvangsblok 3: blok 3 bij aanvangsblok 4: blok 4
840 minuten
bij aanvangsblok 3: blok 3 bij aanvangsblok 4: blok 4
420 minuten
bij aanvangsblok 3: blok 3 bij aanvangsblok 4: blok 4
420 minuten
bij aanvangsblok 3: blok 3 bij aanvangsblok 4: blok 4
Toetsen:
Toetsvorm
MC tentamen
Resultaatschaal
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
Minimum cijfer
5,5
Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
60
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
3
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 3: 1. blok 3, week 6 bij aanvangsblok 4: 1. blok 4, week 16 2. blok 5, week 27
93/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Opdracht
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
40
3
bij aanvangsblok 3: 1. blok 3, week 6 bij aanvangsblok 4: 1. blok 4, week 16 2. blok 5, week 27
94/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1
Korte beschrijving
At the end of the course you will be able: - to analyse an organisational change and develop a change communication plan - to recognize the irrational mechanisms of organisations and its influences on change and communication - to recognize your own behavioural preferences in situations of change - to look at the organisation and the change from different perspectives - to be knowledgeable about the major elements of a (planned) change - to understand the concepts structure, culture, organisational behaviour (organisational, team and individual level), organisational change and organisational communication, and be able to apply these concepts to an organisation - to understand the necessary skills for change and to be conscious of your own skills and points of development
2.2
Learning outcomes
2.3
Kennisbasis
An organisation is a complex structure. Proper internal communication contributes to the successful operation of an organisation. Processes and agreements are clear, employees know what is expected of them and are willing to grow with the organisation. However, what happens when an organisation wishes to introduce change? How will you keep the employees on board? What is the role of communication in this context? In this block you will learn about the internal structure of organisations, organisational change and the possible consequences of change for an organization, its communication and its employees. The subject Organisational Behaviour offers you a psychological/sociological perspective on change. The subject Organisational Change offers you a general management perspective on change.
2.4 Geen
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
2.5 Geen kosten
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 42 Toetsduur (uren): Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 42 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
95/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Communication case 1
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen:
JIC-COCAS1.3V-09 Communication case 1 Communication Case 1 5 European Credits B (bachelor hoofdfase) Nee
D Licina (tel. 3463) (
[email protected]) Engels
Werkvorm
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Frequentie
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Werkcollege
niet verplicht
1 maal per week
1260 minuten
1.11
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 1: blok 1
Toetsen:
Toetsvorm
Resultaatschaal
Minimum cijfer
Opdracht
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
100
2
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 1: 1. blok 1, week 36 2. blok 2, week 46
96/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1
Korte beschrijving
2.2
Learning outcomes
2.3
Kennisbasis
Aims of the course: • Based on developments around an organization you know how to generate business as a consultant and estimate your work load (workshop consultancy) • You can use the starting points of the research design as the guideline while conducting the research. • You can formulate measurable objectives for all levels of communication management • You have insight in various analyzing techniques and can define and segment target groups • You can interpret and use research results for policy making you are able to see and explain the limitations of the research and you are able to make a cost calculation for the research • You can write a business report in the correct tone of voice • You are able to analyze the activities and set clear objectives • You can work goal and result oriented within the frame work • You can protect the progress and quality and are able to prioritize and instruct and guide your team mates
Course content: Via the use of a real life case you work on the earlier discussed theories. You will need to develop a communication plan for a specific situation. In addition to the competencies mentioned in Trends issues and ethics and Media Planning you develop other competencies via workshops during the case. Entry Level
In order to be admitted to this course you will have to have knowledge and skills equal to: Finished all courses of the foundation year (60 EC). 2.4 Ingangseisen Geen Kosten en 2.5 studiematerialen Geen kosten 2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 21 Toetsduur (uren): Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 21 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
97/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Communication case 2
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen:
JIC-COCAS2.3V-09 Communication case 2 Communication Case 2 5 European Credits B (bachelor hoofdfase) Nee
D Licina (tel. 3463) (
[email protected]) Engels
Werkvorm
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Frequentie
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Werkcollege
niet verplicht
2 maal per week
1680 minuten
1.11
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 2: blok 2
Toetsen:
Toetsvorm
Resultaatschaal
Minimum cijfer
Opdracht
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
100
2
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 2: 1. blok 2, week 46 2. blok 3, week 6
98/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1
Korte beschrijving
2.2
Learning outcomes
2.3
Kennisbasis
Aims of the course: • • • • • • • • • • • • •
You are able to analyse the activities and set clear objectives You can work goal and result oriented within the frame work You can protect the progress and quality and are able to prioritise You can instructs and guide your team mates You will be able to act as a spokesperson You have the corresponding oral communication skills You understand your own strengths and weaknesses in these skills You are familiar with the usual modus operandi in maintaining media contacts You understand your You are able to analyse the activities and set clear objectives You can work goal and result oriented within the frame work You can protect the progress and quality and are able to prioritise You can instructs and guide your team mates own role in advising managers on how to deal with the media
Course content:
In this course you will deal with global PR. You will study the influence of societal factors on communication worldwide, image of nations and factors that influence them, you will work on country branding and you will learn how to write press release. Entry Level
In order to be admitted to this course you will have to have knowledge and skills equal to: Finished all courses of the foundation year (60 EC). 2.4 Ingangseisen Geen Kosten en 2.5 studiematerialen Geen kosten 2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 28 Toetsduur (uren): Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 28 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
99/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
The communicating organisation
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen:
Werkvorm
Nee
RCA Versmissen (tel. 3439) (
[email protected]) Engels
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Lecture
niet verplicht
Tutorial
1.11
JIC-COMO.1V-11 The communicating organisation The communicating organisation 5 European Credits D (propedeuse)
niet verplicht
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Frequentie
1 maal per week
1 maal per week
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden?
840 minuten
bij aanvangsblok 3: blok 3 bij aanvangsblok 4: blok 4
840 minuten
bij aanvangsblok 3: blok 3 bij aanvangsblok 4: blok 4
Toetsen:
Toetsvorm
Assignment
Tentamen
Resultaatschaal
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
Minimum cijfer
5,5
5,5
Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
50
50
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden?
3
bij aanvangsblok 3: 1. blok 3, week 6 bij aanvangsblok 4: 1. blok 4, week 16 2. blok 5, week 27
3
bij aanvangsblok 3: 1. blok 3, week 6 bij aanvangsblok 4: 1. blok 4, week 16 2. blok 5, week 27
100/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1 Korte beschrijving During Module Organisation you will be guided towards developing the following competencies from the ICM competencies-list: Research & Design. Research: Engage in research and conduct organizational analysis and SWOT
Design: Produce briefing and debriefing Present pitch Report (cross) media concept
Make corporate video 2.2 Learning outcomes 2.3
Kennisbasis
Organizations communicate in a dynamic environment with several audiences (internal and external, commercial and non-commercial). In addition, an organisation has to compete with many other organizations – especially in an international environment. The challenge for you is to help the organization attract the attention of the target audience and to influence this audience’s attitude. To achieve these objectives you will need to analyze the organization, conclude why the organization could be attractive for the target-audience and consequently what message should be sent to the target audience and how. Learning-goals: At the end of this course you should be able to: - understand and apply the concept Organization structure (Mintzberg) - understand and apply the concept Organization Culture (Hofstede, Trompenaars) - understand and apply the concept Communication Plan; more specifically you understand and are able to apply the following related concepts: - Corporate Communication - Corporate Identity Mix, - Corporate Story - understand how to identify Trends & Issues and you can apply these in a corporate environment - understand and apply the concept prioritizing stakeholders - understand and apply the concept SWOT in a corporate environment.
2.4 Geen
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
2.5 Geen kosten
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 28 Toetsduur (uren): 2 Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 30 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
101/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Corporate Image
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen:
Werkvorm
Lecture
Tutorial
1.11
JIC-CORPIM.2V-12 Corporate Image Corporate Image and Media Relations 5 European Credits B (bachelor hoofdfase) Nee
SE Hackett (
[email protected]) Engels
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
niet verplicht
niet verplicht
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Frequentie
1 maal per week
1 maal per week
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden?
840 minuten
bij aanvangsblok 1: blok 1 bij aanvangsblok 2: blok 2
840 minuten
bij aanvangsblok 1: blok 1 bij aanvangsblok 2: blok 2
Toetsen:
Toetsvorm
Assignment
Exam
Resultaatschaal
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
Minimum cijfer
5,5
5,5
Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
40
60
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden?
3
bij aanvangsblok 1: 1. blok 1, week 36 bij aanvangsblok 2: 1. blok 2, week 46 2. blok 3, week 6
3
bij aanvangsblok 1: 1. blok 1, week 36 bij aanvangsblok 2: 1. blok 2, week 46 2. blok 3, week 6
102/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1 Korte beschrijving After studying this course you will be able to: •understand and can apply: conversation and dialogue on the one hand versus sending on the other hand. •understand and can apply: cross-media concepting and newsjacking for Corporate Communication. •understand and can apply: story-telling versus sending a message (multi-step- flow, two-step-flow, stimulus-response-models). •understand and can apply: how to make the organization attractive for mass- media and social media. •understand and can apply: how to find influentials by: oYou will be able to prioritizing stakeholders o You will be able to map media landscape and its changes. • You understand and can apply: how does a team of journalists decide what news is, what should be published? 2.2 Learning outcomes 2.3
Kennisbasis
This is the Conceptual Learning Line of Block Media Relations in year 2. An organisation operates in an environment with many stakeholders. Maintaining good relations with these stakeholders is in the benefit of the organisation – or even necessary for its sheer existence. A positive attitude towards the organisation promotes this good relation. This attitude is strongly influenced by the perception of the organisation. Image and reputation are concepts that we use to describe this perception. In this module you will learn in what way you build an image and reputation from within your organisation.
2.4 Geen
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
2.5 Geen kosten
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 28 Toetsduur (uren): 1 Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 29 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
103/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Corporate video
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen:
Werkvorm
Nee
RCA Versmissen (tel. 3439) (
[email protected]) Engels
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Tutorial
1.11
JIC-CORV.1V-11 Corporate video Corporate video 5 European Credits D (propedeuse)
niet verplicht
Frequentie
1 maal per week
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
1260 minuten
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 3: blok 3 bij aanvangsblok 4: blok 4
Toetsen:
Toetsvorm
Corporate video
Resultaatschaal
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
Minimum cijfer
5,5
Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
100
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
3
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 3: 1. blok 3, week 6 bij aanvangsblok 4: 1. blok 4, week 16 2. blok 5, week 27
104/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1
Korte beschrijving
In the module Organisation you will work on the following competencies: Research and Design. These competencies are operationalised as follows: Research: - Research and conduct an organizational analysis and SWOT Design: - Make a corporate video design
- Develop a video concept for on and offline cross media dissemination. 2.2 Learning outcomes 2.3 Kennisbasis Organisations communicate in a dynamic environment with several audiences (internal and external, commercial and non-commercial). In addition, an organisation has to compete with many other organizations – especially in an international environment. The challenge for you is to help the organisation attract the attention of the target audience and to influence this audience’s attitude. To achieve these objectives you wil lneed to analyse the organisation, conclude why the organization could be attractive for the target audience and consequently what message should be sent to the target audience and how. In the Project of Module Organisation, you will develop a video concept for cross media dissemination, for an organization that wants to recruit ICM graduates. The core product is a corporate video design which in the organisation convinces ICM graduates that it is very attractive for them to work for this organisation. 2.4 Ingangseisen Geen Kosten en 2.5 studiematerialen Geen kosten 2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 21 Toetsduur (uren): Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 21 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
105/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Designing & journalistic writing
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen: Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Werkvorm
Designing skills
niet verplicht
Journalistic writing skills
1.11
niet verplicht
JIC-DEJOU.1V-13 Designing & journalistic writing Designing & journalistic writing 5 European Credits D (propedeuse) Nee
RCA Versmissen (tel. 3439) (
[email protected]) Engels
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Frequentie
1 maal per week
1 maal per week
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden?
1680 minuten
bij aanvangsblok 1: blok 1 bij aanvangsblok 2: blok 2
1260 minuten
bij aanvangsblok 1: blok 1 bij aanvangsblok 2: blok 2
Toetsen:
Toetsvorm
Designing assignment
Writing assignment
Resultaatschaal
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
Minimum cijfer
5,5
5,5
Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
50
50
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden?
3
bij aanvangsblok 1: 1. blok 1, week 36 bij aanvangsblok 2: 1. blok 2, week 46 2. blok 5, week 27
3
bij aanvangsblok 1: 1. blok 1, week 36 bij aanvangsblok 2: 1. blok 2, week 46 2. blok 5, week 27
106/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1
Korte beschrijving
ICM competencies relevant to Module Media: Advising and planning Within the framework of communication or information policies, the graduate provides advice about the innovation of practice, use of communication means and writes an action plan for that purpose. Developing and Designing The graduates analyses the needs concerning communication means, finds creative solutions for these, translates these into a programme of requirements or a design (e.g. a cross medial concept, a functional or interactive design with programme specifications or a page lay out design) both from a user's perspective and an organizational perspective. Create: creates concept, content and design for different media Design: makes prototype and/or dummy. Corresponds: in English and can comprehend and interpret texts in this language
Implementing The student works on the basis of a communication plan, involves users and other relevant parties in the organization in this and implements the communication means in the organisation. Working in a project The student gives shape to a project on the basis of a communication plan, leads the project, achieves the results agreed upon and works together with other professionals within the project.
2.2
Learning outcomes
2.3
Kennisbasis
Journalistic writing skills You’ll get familiar with three important journalistic genres: news item, press release and feature article. By investigating theory and by practicing you will learn to produce these pieces of text yourself according to the common standards. In doing so, you'll expand your skills in the English language by familiarising yourself with the basic concepts (and some of the terminology) of English grammar. Designing skills You will look at the principles that are the basis for any visual design practice, as well as some of the issues involved in designing for different media. Our focus will be on digital media. So colour palette, composition, resolution, vectors, bitmaps, wireframes, and interactive prototyping may be Abracadabra to you now; by the time you finish this course they will be familiar terms in respect of theory and practice.
2.4 Geen
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
2.5 Geen kosten
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 49 Toetsduur (uren): Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 49 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
107/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Diversity and presentation
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen: Werkvorm
Diversity skills
Presentation skills
1.11
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
verplicht
verplicht
JIC-DIPRE.1V-13 Diversity and presentation Diversity & presentation 5 European Credits D (propedeuse) Nee
RCA Versmissen (tel. 3439) (
[email protected]) Engels
Frequentie
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
2 maal per week
1 maal per week
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden?
2520 minuten
bij aanvangsblok 1: blok 1 bij aanvangsblok 2: blok 2
840 minuten
bij aanvangsblok 1: blok 1 bij aanvangsblok 2: blok 2
Toetsen:
Toetsvorm
Diversity assignment
Presentation
Resultaatschaal
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
Minimum cijfer
5,5
5,5
Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
50
50
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden?
3
bij aanvangsblok 1: 1. blok 1, week 36 bij aanvangsblok 2: 1. blok 2, week 46 2. blok 3, week 6
3
bij aanvangsblok 1: 1. blok 1, week 36 bij aanvangsblok 2: 1. blok 2, week 46 2. blok 3, week 6
108/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1
Korte beschrijving
In the skills course Diversity and Presentation you will work on the following competencies: Research: Conducts target group analysis Researches intercultural issues Researches brand development Design: Several graphical items and an explanation report Presents pitch Create: Converses in English orally
2.2
Learning outcomes
2.3
Kennisbasis
The skills course Diversity and Presentation consists of Diversity skills and Presentation skills. Communication takes place on various levels through various means. Verbally and non-verbally, through written language, through visuals, colour, form etc. Not only will you have to chose your words and visuals carefully in order to convey your message exactly as you mean to convey it; you will also have to be able to identify with your target audience, to put yourself in their shoes, to understand what makes them tick, what their values, needs and motivations are. If you communicate from your own perspective, aims, purposes and needs only, your message will most likely not have the effect you intend. In this course you practice presentation and oral skills, focusing on how a brand relates to and reaches its target audience.
2.4 Geen
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
2.5 Geen kosten
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 56 Toetsduur (uren): Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 56 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
109/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Dutch 1
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen:
JIC-DUT1.2V-12 Dutch 1 Dutch for Beginners 5 European Credits B (bachelor hoofdfase) Nee
AAE Amoros - Espin (
[email protected]) Engels
Werkvorm
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Frequentie
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Werkcollege
niet verplicht
2 maal per week
3360 minuten
1.11
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 1: blok 1, blok 2
Toetsen: Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden?
Toetsvorm
Resultaatschaal
Minimum cijfer
Assignment
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
40
2
bij aanvangsblok 1: 1. blok 2, week 46 2. blok 3, week 6
Exam
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
60
2
bij aanvangsblok 1: 1. blok 2, week 46 2. blok 3, week 6
110/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1
Korte beschrijving
Course Goals and Learning Objectives Students can understand and use familiar everyday expressions and basic phrases aimed at the satisfaction of needs of a concrete type. Students will achieve a basic command of the language needed in a range of familiar situations, e.g. can read short simple texts, can communicate on familiar topics and handle short social exchanges and can write short simple notes and messages. (Common European Framework of Reference: level A1).
2.2
Learning outcomes
2.3
Kennisbasis
Course Description Dutch for Beginners is a training course for basic Dutch. We will focus on communication for everyday purposes in class. In this way the training course will help students get acquainted with the Dutch and their culture and will hopefully contribute to a pleasant stay in this country.
2.4 Geen
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
2.5 Geen kosten
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 56 Toetsduur (uren): 2 Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 58 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
111/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Dutch 2
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen:
JIC-DUT2.2V-12 Dutch 2 Dutch 2 5 European Credits B (bachelor hoofdfase) Nee
AAE Amoros - Espin (
[email protected]) Engels
Werkvorm
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Frequentie
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Werkcollege
niet verplicht
2 maal per week
3360 minuten
1.11
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 3: blok 3, blok 4
Toetsen: Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden?
Toetsvorm
Resultaatschaal
Minimum cijfer
Assignment
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
40
2
bij aanvangsblok 3: 1. blok 4, week 16 2. blok 5, week 27
Exam
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
60
2
bij aanvangsblok 3: 1. blok 4, week 16 2. blok 5, week 27
112/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1
Korte beschrijving
Course Goals and Learning Objectives Students can understand phrases and the highest frequency vocabulary related to areas of most immediate personal relevance, can read very short, simple texts. I can find specific, predictable information in simple everyday material, can communicate in simple and routine tasks requiring a simple and direct exchange of information on familiar topics and activities. Students can use a series of phrases and sentences to describe in simple terms my family and other people, living conditions, my educational background and present or most recent job and can write short, simple notes and messages relating to matters in areas of immediate need (Common European Framework of Reference: level A2).
2.2
Learning outcomes
2.3
Kennisbasis
Course Description Dutch for Beginners is a training course for basic Dutch. We will focus on communication for everyday purposes in class. In this way the training course will help students get acquainted with the Dutch and their culture and will hopefully contribute to a pleasant stay in this country. Dutch 2 is a follow-up of Dutch 1. The course will consist of 2 parts: - Regular language classes (continuation of Dutch 1) - Integrated language part (integrated part of the modules Change Management and/or Media Research) The integrated language part will be divided in 2 parts: Block C: presentation skills (topics chosen from Change Management and/or Media Research) Block D: vocabulary and context related to Change Management and/or Media Research in conversations (oral exam)
2.4 Geen
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
2.5 Geen kosten
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 56 Toetsduur (uren): 2 Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 58 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
113/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Evaluation report
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden?
1.6 1.7 1.8
Contactpersoon
1.9 1.10
Voertaal Werkvormen:
Werkvorm
Nee
E Bekooij-Westerhoudt (tel. 3155) (
[email protected]) Engels
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Project
1.11
JIC-EVA.1V-11 Evaluation report Evaluation report 5 European Credits D (propedeuse)
niet verplicht
Frequentie
1 maal per week
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
1260 minuten
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 3: blok 3 bij aanvangsblok 4: blok 4
Toetsen:
Toetsvorm
Evaluation report
Resultaatschaal
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
Minimum cijfer
5,5
Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
100
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
3
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 3: 1. blok 3, week 6 bij aanvangsblok 4: 1. blok 4, week 16 2. blok 5, week 27
114/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1 Korte beschrijving In the Module Effect you will work on the following competencies: 1. Analysing a problem The graduate has an insight in communication processes as well as policy and organisation processes related to these. He analyses these processes, shapes them and puts them in an organisational context. In addition, he indicates how these processes can be used in the best way by means of communication means within an organisation. 2. Carrying out research As a result of a problem concerning the field of communication and information management, the graduate sets up practical research. The graduate carries out this research, analyses the results and reports about this.
3. Evaluating The graduate researches and assesses the production and use of communication means. He researches the use and effect of communication means.
4. Working in a project The graduate gives shape to a project on the basis of a communication plan, leads the project, achieves the results agreed upon and works together with other professionals within the project. 2.2 Learning outcomes 2.3
Kennisbasis
The student is able to design and manage a research project. The student is able to analyse and evaluate communication strategies and means for a NGO. The student formulates recommendations for an organisation on how to improve communication and media activities. The student writes a research report.
2.4 Geen
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
2.5 Geen kosten
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 21 Toetsduur (uren): Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 21 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
115/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Elders verworven competenties
Opleidingsvariant
Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen:
Werkvorm
1.11
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
JIC-EVC.3V-09 Elders verworven competenties Elders verworven competenties 0 - 30 European Credits B (bachelor hoofdfase) Nee
SE Hackett (
[email protected]) Engels
Frequentie
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden?
Toetsen:
Toetsvorm
Resultaatschaal
Minimum cijfer
Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
Opdracht
OUD Cursussen voldoende of onvoldoende
5,5
100
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden?
1
bij aanvangsblok JAAR: 1. blok JAAR
116/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1
Korte beschrijving
2.2
Learning outcomes
2.3
Kennisbasis
2.4 Geen
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
2.5 Geen kosten
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): Toetsduur (uren): Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 0 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
117/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
French 1
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen:
JIC-FRE1.2V-12 French 1 French 1 5 European Credits B (bachelor hoofdfase) Nee
AAE Amoros - Espin (
[email protected]) Engels
Werkvorm
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Frequentie
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Werkcollege
niet verplicht
2 maal per week
3360 minuten
1.11
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 1: blok 1, blok 2
Toetsen: Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden?
Toetsvorm
Resultaatschaal
Minimum cijfer
Assignment
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
40
2
bij aanvangsblok 1: 1. blok 2, week 46 2. blok 3, week 6
Exam
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
60
2
bij aanvangsblok 1: 1. blok 2, week 46 2. blok 3, week 6
118/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1 Korte beschrijving Course Goals and Learning Objectives French 1 The level of proficiency at the end of French 1 is that of level B1 (as described in the Common European Framework of Reference: http://www.languages.unimaas.nl/niveaus_common_european_framework_reference/CEF_English.htm During the French 1 course you will learn to introduce yourself, how to contact people in different situations, to ask questions, to explain why and how you learn French, to start a telephone conversation, to read and write an e-mail message, to welcome a visitor, to do some social talking, to schedule/cancel/postpone a meeting, to make proposals, to explain inconveniences, to explain working conditions, the schedule of a working day, to verify information, to read and write a business letter, to collect and present information about your destination (history, geography, climate, inhabitants, …), to look up and to present information about public transport, to consult a (subway) map (of Paris), to ask for the route and to explain an itinerary, to present a district/a tourist site, how to choose a hotel (which criteria?), to collect and to present information about hotel accommodations in town, to get informed on and to judge the service and the trumps of a hotel, to make and to modify a hotel reservation (by e-mail), to verify a hotel bill/a receipt/a fax, to write a simple complaints letter 2.2 Learning outcomes 2.3
Kennisbasis
Course Description French 1 French 1 is a training for French intermediate on A2 level as described in the Common European Framework of Reference: http://www.languages.unimaas.nl/niveaus_common_european_framework_reference/CEF_English.htm The students will have lectures twice a week (120 minutes each lecture) during 7 weeks in both block A and B. During the lectures we’ll use the book “français.com”, highly focussed on business French, and “Vocabulaire progressif du français des affaires”. We’ll dedicate time to grammar (explanation and exercises) and we reserve some time for conversation and listening exercises. Students will be encouraged to express themselves in daily situations and typically French circumstances.
2.4 Geen
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
2.5 Geen kosten
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 56 Toetsduur (uren): 2 Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 58 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
119/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
French 2
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen:
JIC-FRE2.2V-12 French 2 French 2 5 European Credits B (bachelor hoofdfase) Nee
AAE Amoros - Espin (
[email protected]) Engels
Werkvorm
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Frequentie
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Werkcollege
niet verplicht
2 maal per week
3360 minuten
1.11
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 3: blok 3, blok 4
Toetsen: Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden?
Toetsvorm
Resultaatschaal
Minimum cijfer
Assignment
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
40
2
bij aanvangsblok 3: 1. blok 4, week 16 2. blok 5, week 27
Exam
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
60
2
bij aanvangsblok 3: 1. blok 4, week 16 2. blok 5, week 27
120/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1
Korte beschrijving
Course Goals and Learning Objectives French 2 The level of proficiency at the end of French 2 is that of level B2 (as described in the Common European Framework of Reference: http://www.languages.unimaas.nl/niveaus_common_european_framework_reference/CEF_English.htm During the general language course French 2 you will learn to get informed about having dinner in a restaurant or at someone’s place, to consult a menu, to choose the dishes, to complain (in a restaurant), to explain your favourite recipe, to read and write a culinary review, to introduce a company (activities, market, line of business,…), to analyse and to compare results and tendencies, to analyse sales strategies of big companies, to launch a new product/service (to fix a price, to choose appropriate communication means, …), to analyse a line of business/a branch of trade, to determine the role/function of the different departments in a company, to compare different ways to equip a workplace, to write an email, a report, to analyse the work climate, to come up with solutions for labour disputes, to compare working and living conditions in different countries. During the integrated language course French 2 you will learn how to prepare a presentation, to prepare/do a presentation, to consult/analyse/write a job advertisement, to give advice, to write an application letter, to examine/select/write a CV, to prepare/analyse/do a job interview, to select the appropriate candidate, to give information about ICM courses.
2.2
Learning outcomes
2.3
Kennisbasis
Course Description French 2 French 1 is a training for French advanced on B1 level as described in the Common European Framework of Reference: http://www.languages.unimaas.nl/niveaus_common_european_framework_reference/CEF_English.htm The students will have general language lectures French 2 : once a week (120 minutes) during 7 weeks in both block 3 and 4 (continuation of French 1). During the lectures we’ll use the book “français.com”, highly focussed on business French, and “Vocabulaire progressif du français des affaires”. We’ll dedicate time to grammar (explanation and exercises) and we reserve some time for conversation and listening exercises. Students will be encouraged to express themselves in daily situations and typically French circumstances. The students will also have integrated language lectures French 2 : once a week (120 minutes) during 7 weeks in both block 3 and 4. During these lectures we’ll dedicate time to French presentation skills (block 3) and job interview skills and vocabulary related to Change Management and/or Media Research in conversations (block 4).
2.4 Geen
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
2.5 Geen kosten
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 56 Toetsduur (uren): 2 Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 58 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
121/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
German 1
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen:
JIC-GER1.2V-12 German 1 German 1 5 European Credits B (bachelor hoofdfase) Nee
AAE Amoros - Espin (
[email protected]) Engels
Werkvorm
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Frequentie
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Werkcollege
niet verplicht
2 maal per week
3360 minuten
1.11
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 1: blok 1, blok 2
Toetsen: Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden?
Toetsvorm
Resultaatschaal
Minimum cijfer
Assignment
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
40
2
bij aanvangsblok 1: 1. blok 2, week 46 2. blok 3, week 6
Exam
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
60
2
bij aanvangsblok 1: 1. blok 2, week 46 2. blok 3, week 6
122/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1
Korte beschrijving
Course Goals and Learning Objectives German 1 The level of proficiency at the end of German 1 is that of level B1 (as described in the Common European Framework of Reference: http://www.languages.unimaas.nl/niveaus_common_european_framework_reference/CEF_English.htm During the German 1 course you will learn to introduce yourself, how to contact people in different situations, to ask questions, to do a telephone conversation, to read and write an e-mail message, to welcome a visitor, to do some social talking, to schedule/cancel/postpone a meeting, to make proposals, to explain inconveniences, to explain working conditions, the schedule of a working day, to verify information, to read and write a business letter, to look up and to present information about public transport, to ask for the route and to explain an itinerary, to present a district/a tourist site, how to choose a hotel (which criteria?), to collect and to present information about hotel accommodations in town, to get informed on and to judge the service and the trumps of a hotel, to make and to modify a hotel reservation (by e-mail), to verify a hotel bill/a receipt/a fax, to write a simple complaints and invitation letter
2.2
Learning outcomes
2.3
Kennisbasis
This course is a 5ec course spread over two blocks. Course Description German 1 German 1 is a training for students who are able to communicate on an basic/intermediate level German A2/B1 level as described in the Common European Framework of Reference: http://www.languages.unimaas.nl/niveaus_common_european_framework_reference/CEF_English.htm The students will have lectures twice a week (120 minutes each lecture) during 7 weeks in both block A and B. During the lectures we’ll use the book “Mittelpunkt B2, highly focussed on business German , We’ll dedicate time to grammar (explanation and exercises) and a substantial part of the course is filled with conversation and listening exercises. Students will be encouraged to express themselves in daily and business situations and typically German circumstances.
2.4 Geen
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
2.5 Geen kosten
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 56 Toetsduur (uren): 2 Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 58 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
123/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
German 2
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen:
JIC-GER2.2V-12 German 2 German 2 5 European Credits B (bachelor hoofdfase) Nee
AAE Amoros - Espin (
[email protected]) Engels
Werkvorm
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Frequentie
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Werkcollege
niet verplicht
2 maal per week
3360 minuten
1.11
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 3: blok 3, blok 4
Toetsen: Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden?
Toetsvorm
Resultaatschaal
Minimum cijfer
Assignment
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
40
2
bij aanvangsblok 3: 1. blok 4, week 16 2. blok 5, week 27
Exam
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
60
2
bij aanvangsblok 3: 1. blok 4, week 16 2. blok 5, week 27
124/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1
Korte beschrijving
Course Goals and Learning Objectives German 2 The level of proficiency at the end of German 2 is that of level B2 for conversation, writing skills: B1/B2 and C1 for audio skills and comprehension of a text. As described in the Common European Framework of Reference: http://www.languages.unimaas.nl/niveaus_common_european_framework_reference/CEF_English.htm During the general language course German 2 you will learn to get informed about having dinner in a restaurant or at someone’s place, to complain (in a restaurant), to explain your favourite recipe, to negotiate in different ways, to introduce a company (activities, market, line of business,…), to analyse and to compare results and tendencies, to describe sales strategies of big companies, to launch a new product/service, to analyse a line of business/a branch of trade, to determine the role/function of the different departments in a company, to compare different ways to equip a workplace, to write an e-mail, a report, to analyse the work climate, to come up with solutions for labour disputes, During the integrated language course German 2 you will learn how to prepare a presentation, to prepare/do a presentation, to consult/analyse/write a job advertisement, to give advice, to write an application letter, to examine/select/write a CV, to prepare/analyse/do a job interview, to select the appropriate candidate, to give information about ICM courses.
2.2
Learning outcomes
2.3
Kennisbasis
This course is a 5ec course which is spread over two blocks. Course Description German 2 German 2 is a training for German advanced on B1 level as described in the Common European Framework of Reference: http://www.languages.unimaas.nl/niveaus_common_european_framework_reference/CEF_English.htm The students will have general language lectures German 2 : once a week (120 minutes) during 7 weeks in both block 3 and 4 (continuation of German1). During the lectures we’ll use the book “Mittelpunkt B2 highly focussed on business German, and choosen texts focussed on pr and communication from the magazins “Marktwirtschaft” and “PRMagazin” We’ll dedicate time to grammar (explanation and exercises) and we reserve time for conversation/presentations and listening exercises. Students will be encouraged to express themselves in situations which are related to business and communication. The students will also have integrated language lectures German 2 : once a week (120 minutes) during 7 weeks in both block 3 and 4. During these lectures we’ll dedicate time to German presentation skills (block 3) and job interview skills and vocabulary related to Change Management and/or Media Research in conversations (block 4).
2.4 Geen
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
2.5 Geen kosten
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 56 Toetsduur (uren): 2 Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 58 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
125/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Graduation Assignment
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen: Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Werkvorm
ICM-Intervisie
1.11
niet verplicht
JIC-GRAAS.3V-09 Graduation Assignment Graduation Assignment 20 European Credits B (bachelor hoofdfase) Nee
HGH Smals (tel. 0031 (0)88 418) (
[email protected]) Engels
Frequentie
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
1 maal per week
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 1: blok 1 bij aanvangsblok 2: blok 2 bij aanvangsblok 3: blok 3 bij aanvangsblok 4: blok 4
420 minuten
Toetsen:
Toetsvorm
Opdracht
Resultaatschaal
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
Minimum cijfer
5,5
Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
100
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
5
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 1: 1. blok 1, week 36 bij aanvangsblok 2: 1. blok 2, week 46 bij aanvangsblok 3: 1. blok 3, week 6 bij aanvangsblok 4: 1. blok 4, week 16 2. blok 5, week 27
126/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1 Korte beschrijving The graduation assignment is the final and most important evidence that a student has fulfilled the requirements for the bachelor's degree awarded by ICM. The student works as an independent consultant on a problem for a real organisation. He/ she conducts research in order to arrive at an advice for solving the problem by means of communication and/ or media. Entry requirements: The ICM student is only allowed to start with the course Graduation Assignment if he/ she meets the following requirements: Finished all courses of the foundation year (60 EC). - Finished at least 30 EC of the total of 50 EC for compulsory courses in year 2. - Finished at least 100 EC. European credits: 20 Teaching language: English Teaching methods & contact hours: Several teaching methods, 1 hour per week. Tests: graduation assignment report & presentation. 2.2 Learning outcomes 2.3
Kennisbasis
Successfully finalising the graduation assignment is the final and most important evidence that you have fulfilled the requirements for the bachelor's degree awarded by ICM. Meaning that you will have to prove that you are ready to work as a professional in communication and media, with a vision that goes beyond a singular medium. You will have to demonstrate that you can analyse an organisational problem and that you understand how to solve this organisational problem with communication and media. You will do this by conducting a research and analysis, resulting in a professional product such as an advice or a policy plan. Although you will produce a report that is very similar to a professional product, you will have to prove that you understand theories and that you are able to apply them in your analysis and solution. This is necessary because you are not a professional yet, but still a student.
2.4 Geen
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
2.5 Geen kosten
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 7 Toetsduur (uren): Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 7 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
127/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Internship
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen:
Nee
MMA Eleveld (tel. 0884818 6253) (
[email protected]) Engels
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Werkvorm
Information internships
Anders
1.11
JIC-INTER.3V-13 Internship Internship 30 European Credits B (bachelor hoofdfase)
niet verplicht
niet verplicht
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Frequentie
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden?
1 maal per blok
bij aanvangsblok 1: blok 1, blok 2 bij aanvangsblok 2: blok 2, blok 3 bij aanvangsblok 3: blok 3, blok 4 bij aanvangsblok 4: blok 4, blok 5
1 maal per blok
bij aanvangsblok 1: blok 1, blok 2 bij aanvangsblok 2: blok 2, blok 3 bij aanvangsblok 3: blok 3, blok 4 bij aanvangsblok 4: blok 4, blok 5
Toetsen:
Toetsvorm
Internship report
Resultaatschaal
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
Minimum cijfer
5,5
Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
100
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
4
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 1: 1. blok 2, week 46 bij aanvangsblok 2: 1. blok 3, week 6 bij aanvangsblok 3: 1. blok 4, week 16
128/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
bij aanvangsblok 4: 1. blok 5, week 27
129/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1
Korte beschrijving
· Learning to apply the acquired theoretical knowledge into practice; · Learning how to perform in a professional environment; · Acquiring more in-depth knowledge of the chosen sector/professional environment; · Acquiring new skills and competencies relevant for the undertaken professional practice; · Reinforcing and complementing existing skills; · Understanding organizational culture; · Gaining intercultural awareness; · Practising and developing social and communication skills in a working relation; · Learning self-management through critical reflection and self-assessment; · Developing professional maturity;
2.2
Learning outcomes
2.3
Kennisbasis
· Students are involved in professional practice or in significant and useful communication and/or media-related assignments; · Students find the link between theory and professional/practical experience; · Students gain more in-depth knowledge; * A student is treated as a potential employee; Requirements: For those students who have not fulfilled their minor abroad: · The language in the working environment is non-native for student (e.g. work placement products used by internal or external stakeholders are produced in a non-native language for student, it is a non-native corporate culture meaning that at least 50% of staff in the student’s working environment is non-native. Note that native origin is determined on the basis of the nationality/nationalities of the student’s passport(s).
2.4 Geen
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
2.5 Geen kosten
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): Toetsduur (uren): Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 0 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
130/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Marketing Communication
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen: Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Werkvorm
Hoorcollege
niet verplicht
Werkcollege
1.11
niet verplicht
JIC-MARCO.2V-13 Marketing Communication Marketing Communication 5 European Credits B (bachelor hoofdfase) Nee
RCA Versmissen (tel. 3439) (
[email protected]) Engels
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Frequentie
2 maal per week
2 maal per week
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden?
1680 minuten
bij aanvangsblok 1: blok 1 bij aanvangsblok 2: blok 2
840 minuten
bij aanvangsblok 1: blok 1 bij aanvangsblok 2: blok 2
Toetsen:
Toetsvorm
Assignment
Exam
Resultaatschaal
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
Minimum cijfer
5,5
5,5
Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
40
60
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden?
3
bij aanvangsblok 1: 1. blok 1, week 36 bij aanvangsblok 2: 1. blok 2, week 46 2. blok 3, week 6
3
bij aanvangsblok 1: 1. blok 1, week 36 bij aanvangsblok 2: 1. blok 2, week 46 2. blok 3, week 6
131/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1
Korte beschrijving
Principles of Marketing section: - You are able to define what marketing is and understand the marketing process - You know the different types of Market Research and are able to decide which research method to use in a given marketing situation. - You understand the relevance of the internet to the future of marketing and how to use the internet effectively for research, distribution, and promotion. - You understand the difference between consumer and business marketing and product and services marketing and can develop strategic plans for them all. - You know the elements of a marketing plan, can write a mission statement, a brand proposition and can develop a SWOT analysis - You understand targeted marketing and can successfully identify a target group and develop plans to reach it. Marketing communications section: - You will understand the difference between advertising and promotion, and their roles in marketing communications. - You will understand how the desired communication effects are achieved in the marketing communications by advertising. - You will know about the importance of the cultural context effect on the consumers’ behavior. - You will be able to relate the marketing communications to the general marketing plan by strategic planning process. - You will know how to identify and understand the target audience and their decision making process. - You will understand how to position the brand by marketing communications. - You will know how to establish and develop communication objectives, brand awareness and brand attitude. - You will know how to develop the media strategy that sends a consistent message for a successful processing. - You will know more about the processing the message and the application of the creative tactics in advertisements.
2.2
Learning outcomes
2.3
Kennisbasis
The Marketing Management course consists of two subjects, Principles of Marketing and Marketing Communication. The integrated information taught in these two subjects will provide you with the necessary conceptual skills to complete your Marketing Communication Project and give you the strategic and practical information you will need as you progress within your chosen area of specialization. Principles of Marketing: In order to understand the function of marketing communication within an organization, it is important that you develop a good understanding of the general Principles of Marketing. In this part of the Marketing Management course you will develop an understanding of the marketing process from the identification of marketing opportunities, through the planning and implementation stages, and finally to the evaluation of the marketing effort. You will study functional areas of marketing such as Market Research, Brand Management, Market Positioning, Target Marketing, Product Development and the differences between Product and Service Marketing and Business and Consumer Marketing. Current examples and case studies will be used to illustrate and reinforce the marketing concepts. Lectures will be used to instill the information, cases to understand the information and (group) assignments to develop your strategic marketing skill set. Marketing communication: In this part of the course, marketing communication will be discussed. In today’s competitive business environment, communication with target audience about the brand/organizations is vital for organizations/companies to survive and be successful. Marketing communications (Marcomm) is applied to communicate with current and potential customers. The final goal of marketing communications is convincing the target customers and selling the brand. This could be achieved by communicating about the brand. For this purpose, the course marketing communications will focus on how to communicate with the target customers through all possible “contact points”. The principles learned in the course principles of marketing and all other communication courses could be used as foundation to build on the marketing communications.
2.4 Geen 2.5
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
Geen kosten 132/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 42 Toetsduur (uren): Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 42 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
133/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Media Case 1
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen:
JIC-MECAS1.3V-09 Media Case 1 Media Case 1 5 European Credits B (bachelor hoofdfase) Nee
M Amador (
[email protected]) Engels
Werkvorm
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Frequentie
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Werkcollege
niet verplicht
2 maal per week
3360 minuten
1.11
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 1: blok 1
Toetsen:
Toetsvorm
Resultaatschaal
Minimum cijfer
Opdracht
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
100
2
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 1: 1. blok 1, week 36 2. blok 2, week 46
134/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1
Korte beschrijving
- develop media campaign: concept, media strategy, visual, interactive, event, design, et cetera - increase skills in media strategies, - develop content and design for media
2.2
Learning outcomes
2.3 Kennisbasis In order to practice theory as well as to increase your knowledge about media strategies and design, you will be working on a case in Bock 1 and 2. In teams of approximately five students you will develop a media campaign, from concept and communication plan to visual identity, magazine, flyer, interactive application, TV commercial and an outdoor event. If necessary, you will also redesign house style and logos. This project is linked to the subjects you will do in the regular program in Block 1 and 2. Part of what you learn there, you can practice during the case. On top of that, there will be additional workshops during the project hours, such as Research, Media Strategy, and Adobe applications like Photoshop, Flash, Premiere Pro, et cetera. These workshops will provide you with more in-depth information on specific subjects, even if you did a comparable course in previous study years. 2.4 Ingangseisen Geen Kosten en 2.5 studiematerialen Geen kosten 2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 56 Toetsduur (uren): Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 56 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
135/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Media Case 2
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen:
JIC-MECAS2.3V-09 Media Case 2 Media Case 2 5 European Credits B (bachelor hoofdfase) Nee
M Amador (
[email protected]) Engels
Werkvorm
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Frequentie
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Werkcollege
niet verplicht
2 maal per week
3360 minuten
1.11
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 2: blok 2
Toetsen:
Toetsvorm
Resultaatschaal
Minimum cijfer
Opdracht
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
100
2
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 2: 1. blok 2, week 46 2. blok 3, week 6
136/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1
Korte beschrijving
2.2
Learning outcomes
2.3 Kennisbasis In order to practice theory as well as to increase your knowledge about media strategies and design, you will be working on a case in Bock 1 and 2. In teams of approximately five students you will develop a media campaign, from concept and communication plan to visual identity, magazine, flyer, interactive application, TV commercial and an outdoor event. If necessary, you will also redesign house style and logos. This project is linked to the subjects you will do in the regular program in Block 1 and 2. Part of what you learn there, you can practice during the case. On top of that, there will be additional workshops during the project hours, such as Research, Media Strategy, and Adobe applications like Photoshop, Flash, Premiere Pro, et cetera. These workshops will provide you with more in-depth information on specific subjects, even if you did a comparable course in previous study years. . Entry Level In order to be admitted to this course you will have to have knowledge and skills equal to: Finished all courses of the foundation year (60 EC).
- Finished Media Case 2. 2.4 Geen
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
2.5 Geen kosten
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 56 Toetsduur (uren): Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 56 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
137/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Media Economics
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen:
JIC-MEDEC.3V-09 Media Economics Media Economics 5 European Credits B (bachelor hoofdfase) Nee
PHT de Groot (
[email protected]) Engels
Werkvorm
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Frequentie
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Werkcollege
niet verplicht
2 maal per week
1680 minuten
1.11
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 1: blok 1
Toetsen:
Toetsvorm
Resultaatschaal
Minimum cijfer
Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden?
Opdracht
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
50
2
bij aanvangsblok 1: 1. blok 1, week 36 2. blok 2, week 46
Schriftelijk tentamen
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
50
2
bij aanvangsblok 1: 1. blok 1, week 36 2. blok 2, week 46
138/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1
Korte beschrijving
2.2
Learning outcomes
2.3
Kennisbasis
Media economics embodies economic theoretical and practical economic questions specific to media of all types. This course sets out the economic principles and concepts needed to understand media industries and issues. The focus lies on economic polices and practices of media companies and disciples including: journalism and the news industry, film production, entertainment programs, print, broadcast, mobile communications, Internet, advertising and public relations. This course will also take a look at the social, cultural, and economic value creation, cross media business models, media ownership and concentration, market share and intellectual property rights. Overview of the content: Introduction to Media Economics and Print Radio and Television Internet and Mobile Not Just for the Money Cross Media Business Models STOF is an acronym for Service, Technology, Organisation, and Finance. We use it as a framework for the design of business models concerning (cross) media productions. Modern economies depend on innovation in media services for future growth. Media service innovation increasingly depends on the creative use of information technology and digitization of information processes. Designing new services is a complex matter, since collaboration with other companies and organizations is necessary. Service innovation is directly related to business models that support these services, i.e. services can only be successful in the long run with a viable business model that creates value for its customers and providers.
2.4 Geen
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
2.5 Geen kosten
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 28 Toetsduur (uren): 2 Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 30 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
139/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Media Literacy
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen:
JIC-MEDLIT.3V-09 Media Literacy Media Literacy 5 European Credits B (bachelor hoofdfase) Nee
IP Louw-Dekker (
[email protected]) Engels
Werkvorm
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Frequentie
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Hoorcollege
niet verplicht
1 maal per week
1680 minuten
1.11
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 2: blok 2
Toetsen:
Toetsvorm
Resultaatschaal
Minimum cijfer
Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
Opdracht
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
100
2
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 2: 1. blok 2, week 46 2. blok 3, week 6
140/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1
Korte beschrijving
Media literacy teaches you the grammar of visual and audditive media. “If you want a happy ending that depends of course on where you stop your story” Orson Welles
2.2
Learning outcomes
2.3
Kennisbasis
1. Photo analyses Describe the photograph denotative Analyse on signs: icon, index and symbol. Analyse on context Analyse the photograph from a connonative perspective. 2. Film analyses on mise-en-scéne, mise-en-shot and montage Analyse the mise-en-scéne Analyse the mise-en-shot Analyse the camera movements Analys how it was edited. Describe the rythm in the film. From what perspective was it filmed How does all this add to the meaning of the film. 3. Film analyses on sound Describe the continuity of Music in the film Describe the continuity of Effects in the film Describe the continuity of Narrative in the film Which sound is diegetic or non-diegetic Which sound is connotative or denotative
2.4 Geen 2.5
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
Geen kosten 2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 28 Toetsduur (uren): Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 28 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
141/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Media Research
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen:
JIC-MEDRES.3V-09 Media Research Media Research 5 European Credits B (bachelor hoofdfase) Nee
PHT de Groot (
[email protected]) Engels
Werkvorm
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Frequentie
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Hoorcollege
niet verplicht
2 maal per week
840 minuten
bij aanvangsblok 1: blok 1
Werkcollege
niet verplicht
2 maal per week
840 minuten
bij aanvangsblok 1: blok 1
1.11
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden?
Toetsen: Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden?
Toetsvorm
Resultaatschaal
Minimum cijfer
Opdracht
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
50
2
bij aanvangsblok 1: 1. blok 1, week 36 2. blok 2, week 46
Opdracht
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
50
2
bij aanvangsblok 1: 1. blok 1, week 36 2. blok 2, week 46
142/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1 Korte beschrijving In this course you will learn how to design, conduct and analyze all kinds of media research, from usability to consumer research. Before spending a fair amount of money on e.g. a media service or advertisement, research is mandatory to see if that whole matter is feasible. 2.2 Learning outcomes 2.3
Kennisbasis
This course provides comprehensive coverage of both quantitative and qualitative social science methods used in research about the media and its role in society. You will be shown how to design and implement meaningful small-scale research projects within the media domain. This course is based on the philosophy that students can learn methods most effectively through actually using and applying them, and to experience media research for themselves. Furthermore, this course: · Explores both qualitative and quantitative approaches so you can choose the right approach for a particular problem · Assumes no background in statistics and introduces most topics with a minimum of algebra · Explains the disciplinary origins of our various research methods, the nature of academic publishing, and the importance of the academic literature · Emphasizes the process of research design as applied to real-world problems and incorporates discussion of research ethics · Gives you a chance to practice as they go along through week-by-week exercises, rather than approaching methods as an abstract subject that must be learned by rote
2.4 Geen
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
2.5 Geen kosten
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 28 Toetsduur (uren): Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 28 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
143/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Media Strategy
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen:
JIC-MEDSTR.3V-09 Media Strategy Media Strategy 5 European Credits B (bachelor hoofdfase) Nee
IP Louw-Dekker (
[email protected]) Engels
Werkvorm
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Frequentie
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Hoorcollege
niet verplicht
1 maal per week
840 minuten
bij aanvangsblok 1: blok 1
Werkcollege
niet verplicht
1 maal per week
1260 minuten
bij aanvangsblok 1: blok 1
1.11
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden?
Toetsen: Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden?
Toetsvorm
Resultaatschaal
Minimum cijfer
Opdracht
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
50
2
bij aanvangsblok 1: 1. blok 1, week 36 2. blok 2, week 46
Schriftelijk tentamen
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
50
2
bij aanvangsblok 1: 1. blok 1, week 36 2. blok 2, week 46
144/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1
Korte beschrijving
In the three previous years you have studied the basics for preparing a marketing, internal and corporate communication strategies for international markets. In other courses you have learned about international marketing, intercultural communications, consumer behavior, instruments and media. During your work placement you have developed practical skills. Now at the end of your study we are adding more depth and theoretical insight to your study. At the end of this year you should be able to function as junior consultant in an agency / consultancy or as junior communications manager at an organization. In this capacity you are able to set up (or brief and evaluate) a realistic media strategy, be it for marketing communications, corporate communications or internal communications.
.
.
2.2
Learning outcomes
2.3
Kennisbasis
•Based on the case description The Sharp Protop 80 you will present your briefing to the whole class and hand in a hard copy of your briefing-report to your lecturer(s). This will be a briefing for a a media planning in a country decided by your teacher (for example France). In short you will play the role of a client from that particular country, (for example the Sharp Marketing Manager France). •This briefing will be the basis for another group to make the Media Planning (for example for France). •Therefore the briefing has to be based on a thourough research into the country that was assigned to you. This research has to be included in the briefing report. (So, as as the Sharp Marketing Manager France you are supposed to provide all the necessary info to Media Planning team.)
2.4 Geen
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
2.5 Geen kosten
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 35 Toetsduur (uren): 2 Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 37 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
145/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Media Trends
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen:
JIC-MEDTRE.3V-09 Media Trends Media Trends 5 European Credits B (bachelor hoofdfase) Nee
PHT de Groot (
[email protected]) Engels
Werkvorm
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Frequentie
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Hoorcollege
niet verplicht
2 maal per week
840 minuten
1.11
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 2: blok 2
Toetsen:
Toetsvorm
Resultaatschaal
Minimum cijfer
Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden?
Opdracht
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
50
2
bij aanvangsblok 2: 1. blok 2, week 46 2. blok 3, week 6
Schriftelijk tentamen
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
50
2
bij aanvangsblok 2: 1. blok 2, week 46 2. blok 3, week 6
146/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1 Korte beschrijving This course focuses on the future and to be specific, the next decennia. We will not look at future (mostly) technological developments as seen in Star Trek or Minority Report but at the media landscape in 2020. But before one could construct 2020 he or she must be able to see the evolution of e.g. a media channel such as television. 2.2 Learning outcomes 2.3
Kennisbasis
A starting point for this course is the media supply chain. The media supply chain (see above) is a model (Brussee & Hekman (2009) extended this model from Doyle (2002)) describing the process of creating media content, starting with a creative process in which media content is produced, and, ending with media content being consumed. Looking at the media supply chain one could perfectly distinguish micro- maxi- and megatrends. This course mainly will focus on the micro- and maxi-trends and thus looking only at the coming decennia. Six (abstract) topics can be distinguished (with subtopics) and could be applied for the media supply chain: •Media content (creation, aggregation and consumption) •Technology (creation, aggregation, distribution and consumption) •Services (creation and consumption) •Virtual (creation and consumption) •Society (creation and consumption) •Economical (creation, aggregation and consumption)
2.4 Geen
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
2.5 Geen kosten
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 14 Toetsduur (uren): 2 Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 16 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
147/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Media Exploration
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen:
JIC-MEEXP.1V-13 Media Exploration Media Exploration 5 European Credits D (propedeuse) Nee
RCA Versmissen (tel. 3439) (
[email protected]) Engels
Werkvorm
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Frequentie
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Lecture
niet verplicht
1 maal per week
840 minuten
bij aanvangsblok 1: blok 1 bij aanvangsblok 2: blok 2
Tutorial
niet verplicht
1 maal per week
840 minuten
bij aanvangsblok 1: blok 1 bij aanvangsblok 2: blok 2
1.11
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden?
Toetsen:
Toetsvorm
Resultaatschaal
Assignment
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
Exam
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
Minimum cijfer
5,5
5,5
Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
50
50
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden?
3
bij aanvangsblok 1: 1. blok 1, week 36 bij aanvangsblok 2: 1. blok 2, week 46 2. blok 3, week 6
3
bij aanvangsblok 1: 1. blok 1, week 36 bij aanvangsblok 2: 1. blok 2, week 46 2. blok 3, week 6
148/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1
Korte beschrijving
ICM competencies relevant to Module Media: Advising and planning Within the framework of communication or information policies, the graduate provides advice about the innovation of practice, use of communication means and writes an action plan for that purpose. Developing and designing The graduates analyses the needs concerning communication means, finds creative solutions for these, translates these into a programme of requirements or a design (e.g. a cross medial concept, a functional or interactive design with programme specifications or a page lay out design) both from a user's perspective and an organizational perspective. Create: creates concept, content and design for different media Design: makes prototype and/or dummy Corresponds in English and can comprehend and interpret texts in this language Implementing The student works on the basis of a communication plan, involves users and other relevant parties in the organization in this and implements the communication means in the organization. Working in a project The student gives shape to a project on the basis of a communication plan, leads the project, achieves the results agreed upon and works together with other professionals within the project.
2.2
Learning outcomes
2.3
Kennisbasis
For 2 x 2 hours a week students will attend a class with a teacher. Although the teacher is in the driver’s seat, there will always be the opportunity to ask questions and put remarks. Exploration needs structure and we will use a much-used process of discover, define and develop to guide students through the process of media exploration. The lessons, literature, assignments and other documents will reflect this process. Although there is no direct connection to the other courses in the Media module, the conceptual course is of help to the choices that students have to make during other courses in the first ICM year. It provides students with background information of mass media.
2.4 Geen
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
2.5 Geen kosten
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 28 Toetsduur (uren): Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 28 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
149/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Me and ICM
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen:
1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
JIC-MEICM.3V-09 Me and ICM Me And ICM 5 European Credits B (bachelor hoofdfase) Nee
PHT de Groot (
[email protected]) Engels
Werkvorm
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Frequentie
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Diverse werkvormen
niet verplicht
1 maal per week
840 minuten
1.11
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 3: blok 3
Toetsen:
Toetsvorm
Resultaatschaal
Minimum cijfer
Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
Opdracht
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
100
2
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 3: 1. blok 3, week 6 2. blok 4, week 16
150/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1
Korte beschrijving
in the course ‘Applied Research’ you have made several critical analyses. For Me & ICM, we ask you to see whether it is possible to start a public debate on the topic of your choice. We want you to look into the tools you can use, and reflect on their effectiveness by bringing a topic to the public’s attention. Entry Level In order to be admitted to this course you will have to have knowledge and skills equal to: - Finished all courses of the foundation year (60 EC).
2.2
Learning outcomes
2.3
Kennisbasis
The emphasis within ICM and I should be on your role as a future professional who has to cope with developments in society. For Applied Research you have generated ideas for a practical relevant discussion, for ICM and I you select the relevant Applied Research findings, and you collect and analyse data. Based on these findings we want you to phrase a question that is of interest for a public debate. Upload this question 72 hours before the instruction meeting in week 1 of period C to Sharepoint. Your lecturer must approve your question before you can start with the debate. Hand in 1 A4 in which you explain your topic and present the question you want to raise in the debate.
2.4 Geen
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
2.5 Geen kosten
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 14 Toetsduur (uren): Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 14 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
151/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Online magazine
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen:
JIC-ONLM.1V-11 Online magazine Online magazine 5 European Credits D (propedeuse) Nee
RCA Versmissen (tel. 3439) (
[email protected]) Engels
Werkvorm
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Frequentie
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Online magazine
niet verplicht
1 maal per week
1260 minuten
1.11
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 1: blok 1 bij aanvangsblok 2: blok 2
Toetsen:
Toetsvorm
Resultaatschaal
Online magazine
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
Minimum cijfer
5,5
Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
100
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
3
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 1: 1. blok 1, week 36 bij aanvangsblok 2: 1. blok 2, week 46 2. blok 3, week 6
152/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1
Korte beschrijving
This course is part of module Media. n this course you learn how to develop, create, plan, design, and deliver a project while working in a project team. Moreover, this project will help you to learn to integrate and apply the basic knowledge, skills and attitudes concerning communication, media, culture and related areas necessary to work in the professional field of communication and media in an international environment. Design: - Produces project plan - Presents concept & pitch Create: - Creates concept, content and design Implement: - Makes a prototype of an iPad magazine Corresponds in English and can comprehend and interpret text in this language 2.2
Learning outcomes
2.3
Kennisbasis
In this module students will be working in a design team of four people for a communication agency. They will be responsible for creating a new iPad app for an international target audience for the famous British chef Olivia James, to be published by the multinational media group Sanoma (fiction, yet serious business!). In teams of four students will produce an interactive prototype for the iPad app. Leading up to this final product students will go through the phases of the Design Process and create deliverables along the way, which will be a project proposal, design documentation and an interactive prototype respectively.For a detailed description of all professional products and the delivery criteria see the student manual. The level of independence in respect of this project is ‘high’: students are in control, lecturers have a coaching role, and a proactive learning attitude is essential. 2.4 Geen
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
2.5 Geen kosten
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 21 Toetsduur (uren): Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 21 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
153/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Online Research & Professional Behaviour
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 Cursuscode 1.2 Cursusnaam 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
JIC-ONRPB.2V-12 Online Research & Professional Behaviour Online Research for Media Research Professional Behaviour for Change Cursusnaam in Engels Management Aantal EC's 5 European Credits Studiefase/niveau B (bachelor hoofdfase) Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van Nee andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon SE Hackett (
[email protected]) Voertaal Engels Werkvormen: Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Werkvorm
Werkcollege
niet verplicht
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Frequentie
2 maal per week
1680 minuten
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 3: blok 3 bij aanvangsblok 4: blok 4
1.11 Toetsen: Toetsvorm
Resultaatschaal
Assignment
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
Assignment
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
Minimum cijfer
5,5
5,5
Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
50
50
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden?
3
bij aanvangsblok 3: 1. blok 3, week 6 bij aanvangsblok 4: 1. blok 4, week 16 2. blok 5, week 27
3
bij aanvangsblok 3: 1. blok 3, week 6 bij aanvangsblok 4: 1. blok 4, week 16 2. blok 5, week 27
154/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1
Korte beschrijving
Professional Behaviour The learning goals of this course are: a) to gain insight in the social mechanisms of the professional surrounding and b) to reflect on the own role and the role of the others within. These goals will be achieved when the student: understands the contribution of an individual within a group; the mechanisms within the group; the variety and the importance of the leadership styles; the influence of the culture and the differences between them; - is able to reflect on the professional situation by means of an analysis of the corresponding behaviour of those involved and give advice based on this; - is able to give a self reflection based on the cases. Online Research After this course students should: •have an understanding of the Internet and the development of online research •be aware of prominent online research trends •have an understanding of online quantitative survey research •grasp the fundamentals of qualitative survey research •be familiar with social media research and tools •have an understanding of ethnographical research and social media •be familiar with international research •understand the fundamentals of website research •understand the concept business to business research
2.2
Learning outcomes
2.3
Kennisbasis
Professional Behaviour The environment of an organisation changes constantly. One of the tasks of communication/ media specialists is to interpret and weigh relevant signals and to react accordingly. To be able to do so, the communication specialist needs to be highly professional. During this course, the student will learn and apply aspects of this professional behaviour, will be trained on skills necessary within leadership, projects and general management, but on the reflexion as well because real professional is also able to reflect on his/her abilities and the situational behaviour. These are the kind of questions we address during this course. Online Research Media research for second year students has been designed as a continuation of the first year research course, which offered an introduction and overview of selected research concepts and practices. In view of the rapid development in media technology, the second year course focuses more on online/digital research. You will be introduced to a range of skills, which will equip you to conduct online research. Areas in this course that receive special attention include online qualitative and quantitative research designs, web research and the use of social media for the purpose of conducting research. After completion of the course, you should be able to develop and implement basic research projects related to problems in the workplace.
2.4 Geen
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
2.5 Geen kosten
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 28 Toetsduur (uren): Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 28 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
155/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Project Change Communication
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen:
JIC-PCHCO.2V-13 Project Change Communication Project Change Communication 5 European Credits B (bachelor hoofdfase) Nee
RCA Versmissen (tel. 3439) (
[email protected]) Engels
Werkvorm
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Frequentie
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Project
niet verplicht
1 maal per week
1260 minuten
bij aanvangsblok 3: blok 3 bij aanvangsblok 4: blok 4
Communication Change
niet verplicht
2 maal per blok
360 minuten
bij aanvangsblok 3: blok 3 bij aanvangsblok 4: blok 4
1.11
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden?
Toetsen:
Toetsvorm
Resultaatschaal
Minimum cijfer
Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
Project
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
100
2
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 3: 1. blok 3, week 6 bij aanvangsblok 4: 1. blok 4, week 16
156/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1
Korte beschrijving
Learning Goals You are able to perform qualitative research You are able to perform a situational analysis You are able to define the relevant agents in a change communication process You are able to translate information needs and wants of your target audience into appropriate communication You are able to set clear SMART objectives You are able to create a change communication plan You are able to develop a strategy that delivers the message effectively and efficiently to the target audience You are able to translate strategy in appropriate tactics You are able to reflect on your learning progress how you can improve. You are able to refer to sources according to APA standards You are able to plan your activities You are able to perform in a team You have a pro-active attitude and you take initiative You are developing and showing a professional attitude (see code of conduct)
2.2
Learning outcomes
2.3
Kennisbasis
This project is about organisational change. While working on the project you will become familiar with the basic problems of and possible solutions in communicating about change. You have to analyse, organise and communicate change. You do this by solving the problems at hand in one of the cases offered to you in this course project. During this project you work in teams of four students. Cases and selection On share point you can access the folder Project Cases JIC-ORGCHA.2V-12 which contains a set of different cases which you have to select from. Each team selects one case. A case can only be selected twice. The group claim for the case is done on a FCFS basis by email. The case you select focuses an organisational problem related to change management. The fields in which these problems are situated will be different. There will be cases in the field of mergers and acquisitions, human resources, innovation etc. Each case has a clear briefing added to it which explains what is expected from the team. Project and Workshops Three interrelated workshop sessions will be offered in parallel to this project. The first workshop session will address the problems of organisational analysis. In it several tools for organisational analysis will be explained and practiced. The purpose of this workshop is to help you to identify, to give you understanding of and means to clarify the problems in the case you selected. The second workshop session will be on communicating change. The differences between general communication and change communication will be the focal points. In the third workshop session the topic will be how to make a proper change communication plan. These three workshop sessions will not be directly assessed. Its assessment is of an indirect nature. In the project itself you have to show how you have applied the knowledge and skills which you incorporated while participating in these workshop sessions.
2.4 Geen
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
2.5 Geen kosten
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 27 Toetsduur (uren): Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 27 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal.
157/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2.7
Opmerkingen
2.8
URL cursussite
158/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Project Commercial Communication
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen:
JIC-PCOCO.2V-13 Project Commercial Communication Project Commercial Communication 5 European Credits B (bachelor hoofdfase) Nee
RCA Versmissen (tel. 3439) (
[email protected]) Engels
Werkvorm
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Frequentie
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Project
niet verplicht
1 maal per week
1260 minuten
bij aanvangsblok 1: blok 1 bij aanvangsblok 2: blok 2
Werkcollege 1
verplicht
3 maal per blok
360 minuten
bij aanvangsblok 1: blok 1 bij aanvangsblok 2: blok 2
1.11
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden?
Toetsen:
Toetsvorm
Resultaatschaal
Project
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
Minimum cijfer
5,5
Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
100
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
3
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 1: 1. blok 1, week 36 bij aanvangsblok 2: 1. blok 2, week 46 2. blok 3, week 6
159/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1
Korte beschrijving
At the end of this course you should be able to: •Research and analyze an organization •Market research in the relevant industry area •Research about the target audience needs •Use these date for segmentation and positioning the brand in the minds of your target •Develop a marketing communication plan for an international environment. •Work successfully in a team.
2.2
Learning outcomes
2.3
Kennisbasis
As you will experience in your future career as a communication professional working in the field of marketing or marketing communication, today’s competitive business environment, communication with target audience about the brand/organizations is vital for organizations/companies to survive and be successful. The primary goal of marketing communications is to build awareness of a business, its products, and its position through customer-facing materials such as brochures, press releases, and websites. Planning an integrated and consistent cross-team approach to these activities — one that reinforces a company's message with target audiences and motivates customers to buy — is the marketing communications manager's top responsibility. A good marketing communications plan requires you to do substantial research. You need to have an in-depth understanding of your target audiences and the processes involved in buying, selling, and communicating. After you've armed yourself with the knowledge that you need, you can determine what you hope to gain from your marketing activities, what you want your customers to know, and how best to communicate that information to them. You'll also need to decide on a budget and schedule, and to evaluate any constraints that these might place on the campaign. In this course you will develop a marketing communication plan for a client. Microsoft has recently launched its Surface tablet. With a team (4 students) you will do market research about this product, write a marketing communication plan and a social media plan. An important factor is, that all teams will do this for a different country. So the intercultural aspect is very important in this block. As mentioned before, you will also need to decide on a budget. You will learn how to apply this in an additional workshop, so you can use this to, to develop your marketing communication plan. You will work in groups of 4 to realize these objectives. To guide your progress, you will be assigned a project coach, whom you may meet on a weekly basis.
2.4 Geen
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
2.5 Geen kosten
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 27 Toetsduur (uren): Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 27 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
160/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Project Free Publicity
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen:
JIC-PFRPU.2V-13 Project Free Publicity Project Free Publicity 5 European Credits B (bachelor hoofdfase) Nee
RCA Versmissen (tel. 3439) (
[email protected]) Engels
Werkvorm
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Frequentie
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Project
niet verplicht
1 maal per week
1260 minuten
bij aanvangsblok 1: blok 1 bij aanvangsblok 2: blok 2
Press Kit
niet verplicht
2 maal per blok
360 minuten
bij aanvangsblok 1: blok 1 bij aanvangsblok 2: blok 2
1.11
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden?
Toetsen:
Toetsvorm
Resultaatschaal
Project
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
Minimum cijfer
5,5
Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
100
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
3
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 1: 1. blok 1, week 36 bij aanvangsblok 2: 1. blok 2, week 46 2. blok 3, week 6
161/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1
Korte beschrijving
At the end of this project you should be able to: - Research and analyze an organization and the relevant industry area and create an organizational - Analysis as the basis for your media strategy. - Understand what cross media entails and harness the possibilities for an effective publicity strategy. - Write and design the relevant documents for your Cross Media Kit. - Create a multimedia website to present your Media Kit. - Create all your deliverables for an international environment. - Work successfully in a team.
2.2
Learning outcomes
2.3
Kennisbasis
As you will experience in your future career as a communication professional working in the field of publicity or public relations, the media landscape gets more scattered every day and competition between the media is fierce. Your challenge will be: how to make sure your client’s news message will be heard, seen and read by the right audiences in this environment. Sending out a single press release, hoping editors will pick up this message, will no longer do the trick. In this project you will develop a cross media publicity road map that is focused on creating an effective free publicity strategy for a real client. In order for this strategy to be successful you will have to put into practice three trends that will define corporate communication for years to come: the communicating company, cross media deployment and visual storytelling. You will be working for a live client that, for some reason, has a need for such a strategy. In this project you will first produce an organizational analysis, then a cross-media publicity strategy, and finally a media kit. This media kit, that includes a corporate video will be published on a fictive version of the client’s website. For this purpose you will also learn how to build a simple web site in 2 additional workshop sessions. You will work in groups of 4 to 5 to realize these objectives. To guide your progress, you will be assigned a project coach, whom you may meet on a weekly basis.
2.4 Geen
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
2.5 Geen kosten
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 27 Toetsduur (uren): Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 27 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
162/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Project Media Research
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen:
JIC-PMERE.2V-13 Project Media Research Project Media Research 5 European Credits B (bachelor hoofdfase) Nee
RCA Versmissen (tel. 3439) (
[email protected]) Engels
Werkvorm
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Frequentie
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Werkcollege 1
niet verplicht
1 maal per week
1260 minuten
bij aanvangsblok 3: blok 3 bij aanvangsblok 4: blok 4
Werkcollege 2
niet verplicht
3 maal per blok
360 minuten
bij aanvangsblok 3: blok 3 bij aanvangsblok 4: blok 4
1.11
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden?
Toetsen:
Toetsvorm
Resultaatschaal
Minimum cijfer
Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
Project
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
100
2
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 3: 1. blok 3, week 6 bij aanvangsblok 4: 1. blok 4, week 16
163/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1
Korte beschrijving
Learning goals •You have a basic understanding of the following concepts: Media landscape, media research, document research, report writing, visual thinking •You are able to refer to sources according to APA standards •You are able to perform online document research •You are able to combine complex data •You are able to present complex information in a clear and interesting way •You are able to write a well structured research report •You are re able to reflect on your learning progress how you can improve •You are able to plan your activities •You are able to perform in a team •You have a pro-active attitude and you take initiative •You are developing and showing a professional attitude (see code of conduct)
2.2
Learning outcomes
2.3
Kennisbasis
As you know from the course Understanding Intercultural Media, the conceptual line, dramatic changes with severe impact take place in what we call the Media landscape. Several theoretical perfectives are available to describe and explain what is actually happening. These theoretical approaches even make it possible to formulate predictions on the future developments. In this course you have to do your own research on these issues and trends in the media landscape. On this research you write a report. You also offer your findings in a presentation. During this project you work in teams of four students. In this project you have to select a professional field in the media landscape, for example the press. In this field there are specific forms press: regional and national newspapers, magazines of all sorts, local radio etc. These forms are all undergoing some type of change. These changes can have financial, political, technical and cultural grounds. More grounds are possible. However there is not just one media landscape. Each country, each region in the world has its unique landscape with its unique fields and forms. What you have to research is what is going on for one form in one field in three counties in different regions. One country has to be part of Western Europe. One country has to part of Eastern Europe (former USSR influence). The third country can be picked from the remaining group of countries. So you could end up with research on trends and issues of the local press in Belgium, Croatia and Indonesia. You have to describe the development, trends and issues in these counties. You present the differences, similarities between these countries relevant to your research question. (What is going on where?) You provide reasons and explanations. (What is going on why?) You also give a view on the effect these developments will have on these countries. It is essential to pay attention to what all these development have for the general public. (What are the political, cultural consequences etc.?) To describe the development, trends and issues you have to go back at least 20 years in time. The information on the developments, trends and issues is complex, scattered and very often difficult to assess and to combine. For these reasons you have to do a preliminary research to check if the research you want to conduct is feasible. The description and results of this preliminary research is part of your plan of action. When you are done with this part of the module you know a lot more about the developments in the international media landscape. On top of this you will experience to do research into the general and specific media trends and changes. Within the framework of this project you will have the opportunity to select areas of interest you want to do research in. In this course the content, focus and input of conceptual and skills line come together. Project and Workshops Parallel to this project three interrelated sets of workshop sessions will be offered. Both workshop sessions addressing the presentation of complex and difficult information in a logical, intelligent, FCJ student manual JIC-INTMR.2V-12, Module Media Research Research Report on Media Trends and Issues 2012-2013 Page 4 of 12 interesting and appealing way. The first workshop set is addressing the problems of writing a professional report. The purpose of this workshop is to help you organise information and to provide you with criteria with regard to structure and contents that will be required in the writing of the media research report. The second workshop set is on visual thinking. In these workshops you will be focussing on the area of visual thinking and communicating as a powerful tool for a communication professional. You will learn how to use visual information to augment
164/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014 written or mathematical information in your research report. You will also combine oral language with imagery to create an engaging and effective presentation or your research report for an international audience. The focus of the third workshop is to arm you with the tools necessary to develop a well-designed InDesign report document that is set to correct printer specifications. In the project itself you have to show how you applied the knowledge and skills which you gained while participating in these workshop sessions. More information on the workshops can be found in the workshop section of sharepoint
2.4 Geen
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
2.5 Geen kosten
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 27 Toetsduur (uren): Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 27 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
165/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Research concepts
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen:
JIC-RECON.1V-13 Research concepts Research concepts 5 European Credits D (propedeuse) Nee
RCA Versmissen (tel. 3439) (
[email protected]) Engels
Werkvorm
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Frequentie
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Tutorial 1
niet verplicht
1 maal per week
840 minuten
bij aanvangsblok 3: blok 3 bij aanvangsblok 4: blok 4
Tutorial 2
niet verplicht
1 maal per week
840 minuten
bij aanvangsblok 3: blok 3 bij aanvangsblok 4: blok 4
1.11
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden?
Toetsen:
Toetsvorm
Resultaatschaal
Assignment
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
Exam
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
Minimum cijfer
5,5
5,5
Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
50
50
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden?
3
bij aanvangsblok 3: 1. blok 3, week 6 bij aanvangsblok 4: 1. blok 4, week 16 2. blok 5, week 27
3
bij aanvangsblok 3: 1. blok 3, week 6 bij aanvangsblok 4: 1. blok 4, week 16 2. blok 5, week 27
166/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1
Korte beschrijving
During Module Effect we will help you to develop the following competencies from the ICM competencies-list: Research & Design. For Module Effect these competencies are operationalised as follows: Analyse The student has the conceptual knowledge to identify and analyse an organisational problem related to communication. The candidate understands the concepts and processes involved in a research study for example, define the problem, develop subproblems and research questions. The student is further able to analyse information collected on an organisational problem and to construct a suitable research design to find a possible solution to the problem. Develop The student is able to conceptually develop a research proposal suitable for a specific research problem. The research proposal includes the formulation of aims and objectives and a suitable research design for the organisational problem can be solved. The student is also equipped to develop an approach for the use of social media as research tools in an organisation. Evaluate The student can evaluate research methods in order to find a suitable method to solve organisational problems. The evaluation of research methods further involves the use of qualitative or quantitative data analysis and the reporting of the results. Research The student has an insight into and is able to engage in applied research. He/she understands the difference between offline and online research and is able to put these in organisational context. The student is further knowledgeable on the development of contemporary online research practices such as running a participating blog and the nature and function of online communities. With respect to online communities the student understands the value and use of social media when engaging in research.
2.2
Learning outcomes
2.3
Kennisbasis
An organisation communicates because it wants to influence a target audience. You want people to change in terms of knowledge, behaviour or attitude. Sending messages across (a combination of) media is part of your tool kit. How do you know whether the supposed effect is really established? And in what ways can you evaluate the effect of a medium and/or message? What works and what doesn’t? The conceptual learning line is focused on analysis and interpretation, you will learn to analyse and interpret information with the aim of solving organisational problems.
2.4 Geen
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
2.5 Geen kosten
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 28 Toetsduur (uren): 2 Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 30 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
167/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Scriptwriting & video editing
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen:
JIC-SCVID.1V-13 Scriptwriting & video editing Scriptwriting & video editing 5 European Credits D (propedeuse) Nee
RCA Versmissen (tel. 3439) (
[email protected]) Engels
Werkvorm
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Frequentie
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Scriptwriting skills
niet verplicht
1 maal per week
1260 minuten
bij aanvangsblok 3: blok 3 bij aanvangsblok 4: blok 4
Video editing skills
niet verplicht
1 maal per week
1260 minuten
bij aanvangsblok 3: blok 3 bij aanvangsblok 4: blok 4
1.11
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden?
Toetsen: Toetsvorm
Resultaatschaal
Scriptwriting assignment
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
Video editing assignment
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
Minimum cijfer
5,5
5,5
Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
50
50
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden?
3
bij aanvangsblok 3: 1. blok 3, week 6 bij aanvangsblok 4: 1. blok 4, week 16 2. blok 5, week 27
3
bij aanvangsblok 3: 1. blok 3, week 6 bij aanvangsblok 4: 1. blok 4, week 16 2. blok 5, week 27
168/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1
Korte beschrijving
During Module Organisation you will develop the following competencies from ICM competencies list: Research & Design. For Module Organisation these competencies are operationalized as follows: Scriptwriting: • Concept development • Communication (visual thinking, writing in script format) • Script Analysis and Evaluation • Cross-media skills (integrating video in a broader cross-media concept) Video Editing: • Storyboard design • Producing and filming a video • Editing with a non-linear video editing system
2.2
Learning outcomes
2.3
Kennisbasis
The course will introduce you to the video making process by engaging you the three phases involved: pre-production (script writing and formatting, creating storyboards, location scouting), production (filming), and post-production (video and sound editing). In the Scriptwriting class you will learn the methodology of putting the story together, in the Video Editing class you will take that story to the screen and practice cinematic storytelling. You will learn about different corporate video ‘genres’. In addition, you will learn some of the recent video applications such as viral and interactive video (the latter engaging audience in interactive experiences). Scriptwriting ● The course is a basic introduction to fundamentals of scriptwriting in a corporate setting. ● The topics covered are: ○ Concept development ○ Treatment, script and storyboard production ○ Communication (visual thinking, writing in script format) Video Editing ● The course is a basic introduction to fundamentals of video production and post-production (audio and video editing) ● The topics covered are: ○ Elements of film ○ Creating and framing shots to tell your story ○ Editing techniques ○ Deploying your finished video in various formats to reach your audience
2.4 Geen
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
2.5 Geen kosten
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 42 Toetsduur (uren): Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 42 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
169/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Social Media and Communication Skills
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen:
JIC-SMCSK.2V-13 Social Media and Communication Skills Social Media and Communication Skills 5 European Credits B (bachelor hoofdfase) Nee
RCA Versmissen (tel. 3439) (
[email protected]) Engels
Werkvorm
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Frequentie
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Werkcollege
niet verplicht
2 maal per week
1680 minuten
1.11
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 1: blok 1 bij aanvangsblok 2: blok 2
Toetsen:
Toetsvorm
Resultaatschaal
Assignment
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
Exam
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
Minimum cijfer
5,5
5,5
Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
50
50
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden?
3
bij aanvangsblok 1: 1. blok 1, week 36 bij aanvangsblok 2: 1. blok 2, week 46 2. blok 3, week 6
3
bij aanvangsblok 1: 1. blok 1, week 36 bij aanvangsblok 2: 1. blok 2, week 46 2. blok 3, week 6
170/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1
Korte beschrijving
Social Media - Understand implications of social media and digital technologies on marketing communication. Be able to analyze and evaluate different social media marketing applications. - Understand the difference between various social media platforms/tools and their usage. Be able to use a variety of social media marketing tools for analysing, measurement, and tracking (at a basic level). Communication skills - This course will address your journalistic writing style: how to catch and to keep your reader’s attention. Therefore, at the end of this course you will have to be able to produce the products below (with components of the press kit as a reference).
2.2
Learning outcomes
2.3
Kennisbasis
Social Media for Marketing Developments in information technology and real-time communication have created significant impact across the fields of strategic communication: marketing, public relations and advertising. Awareness and understanding of this impact and how it transformed business environments are necessary for any communication professional in order to meet the challenges it brings about. In this context, this course explores topics such as: what types of marketing strategy and/or practices work on the social web? Why is traditional, interruptive marketing not adaptable to the new media ecology? How has the role of consumer/marketer changed? How digital tools and platforms provide marketers with innovative ways to meet new market demands? What are ethical issues in social media marketing? Selected readings will provide you with theoretical understanding of some of major issues pertaining to social media and marketing intersection. Social media marketing applications will be analyzed and evaluated; case studies will be used as class discussion platforms. You will gain practical knowledge by analyzing and engaging with different social media tools on a weekly basis Communication Skills In the course Writing skills you will set out to enhance your journalistic writing skills. Has the emphasis been on the properties of text types and on Journalistic techniques in your first year, this year we look at your writing style in depth. You will write a press release but this time for your project customer, you will write a “bio” about one or some of the employees of that company, learning how to paint with words. And you will write an “about us”, learning how to make sure that the language you use is attractive enough to catch and keep the attention of a broad audience.
2.4 Geen
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
2.5 Geen kosten
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 28 Toetsduur (uren): Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 28 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
171/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Spanish 1
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen:
JIC-SPA1.2V-12 Spanish 1 Spanish 1 5 European Credits B (bachelor hoofdfase) Nee
AAE Amoros - Espin (
[email protected]) Engels
Werkvorm
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Frequentie
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Werkcollege
verplicht
2 maal per week
1680 minuten
1.11
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 1: blok 1, blok 2
Toetsen:
Toetsvorm
Resultaatschaal
Minimum cijfer
Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden?
Opdracht
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
40
2
bij aanvangsblok 1: 1. blok 2, week 46 2. blok 3, week 6
Schriftelijk tentamen
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
60
2
bij aanvangsblok 1: 1. blok 2, week 46 2. blok 3, week 6
172/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1
Korte beschrijving
Course Goals and Learning Objectives Spanish 1 The level of proficiency at the end of Spanish for Beginners is that of a ‘basic user’ (= level A1) as described in the Common European Framework of Reference: http://www.languages.unimaas.nl/niveaus_common_european_framework_reference/CEF_English.htm Students can understand and use familiar everyday expressions and basic phrases aimed at the satisfaction of needs of a concrete type. Students will achieve a basic command of the language needed in a range of familiar situations, e.g. can read short simple texts, can communicate on familiar topics and handle short social exchanges and can write short simple notes and messages. (Common European Framework of Reference: level A1).
2.2
Learning outcomes
2.3
Kennisbasis
Course Description Spanish 1
Spanish for Beginners is a training course for basic Spanish. We will focus on communication for everyday purposes in class. In this way the training course will help students get acquainted with the Spanish and their culture and will hopefully contribute to motivate the students to choose to do their Minor or Internship in one of the many countries where Spanish is the official language. In class we will focus on reading skills, listening skills, speaking skills and writing skills. Students will be assessed on all four disciplines. 2.4 Geen
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
2.5 Geen kosten
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 28 Toetsduur (uren): 2 Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 30 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
173/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Spanish 2
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen:
JIC-SPA2.2V-12 Spanish 2 Spanish 2 5 European Credits B (bachelor hoofdfase) Nee
AAE Amoros - Espin (
[email protected]) Engels
Werkvorm
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Frequentie
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Werkcollege
niet verplicht
2 maal per week
3360 minuten
1.11
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 3: blok 3, blok 4
Toetsen:
Toetsvorm
Resultaatschaal
Minimum cijfer
Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
Assignment
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
40
2
bij aanvangsblok 3: 1. blok 4, week 16 2. blok 5, week 27
Exam
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
60
2
bij aanvangsblok 3: 1. blok 4, week 16 2. blok 5, week 27
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden?
174/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1 Korte beschrijving Course Goals and Learning Objectives Spanish 2 The level of proficiency at the end of Spanish for Beginners is that of a ‘basic user’ (= level A2) as described in the Common European Framework of Reference: http://www.languages.unimaas.nl/niveaus_common_european_framework_reference/CEF_English.htm Students can understand phrases and the highest frequency vocabulary related to areas of most immediate personal relevance, can read very short, simple texts. I can find specific, predictable information in simple everyday material, can communicate in simple and routine tasks requiring a simple and direct exchange of information on familiar topics and activities. Students can use a series of phrases and sentences to describe in simple terms my family and other people, living conditions, my educational background and present or most recent job and can write short, simple notes and messages relating to matters in areas of immediate need (level A2) 2.2 Learning outcomes 2.3
Kennisbasis
Course Description Spanish 2 Spanish for Beginners is a training course for basic Spanish. We will focus on communication for everyday purposes in class. In this way the training course will help students get acquainted with the Spanish and their culture and will hopefully contribute to motivate the students to choose to do their Minor or Internship in one of the many countries where Spanish is the official language. Spanish 2 is a follow-up of Spanish 1. The course will consist of 2 parts: - Regular language classes (continuation of Spanish 1) - Integrated language part (integrated part of the modules Change Management and/or Media Research) The integrated language part will be divided in 2 parts: Block C: presentation skills (topics chosen from Change Management and/or Media Research) Block D: vocabulary related to Change Management and/or Media Research in conversations (oral exams)
2.4 Geen
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
2.5 Geen kosten
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 56 Toetsduur (uren): 2 Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 58 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
175/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Study Abroad
Opleidingsvariant
Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen: Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Werkvorm
1.11
JIC-STUDYABR-09 Study Abroad Study Abroad 1 - 30 European Credits B (bachelor hoofdfase) Nee
MMA Eleveld (tel. 0884818 6253) (
[email protected]) Engels
Frequentie
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden?
Toetsen:
Toetsvorm
Resultaatschaal
Minimum cijfer
Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden?
Assessment
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
100
1
bij aanvangsblok JAAR: 1. blok JAAR
176/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1 Korte beschrijving Study abroad enables students to work on their competencies in an international and/ or intercultural environment. 2.2 Learning outcomes 2.3
Kennisbasis
2.4 Geen
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
2.5 Geen kosten
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): Toetsduur (uren): Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 0 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
177/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Trends Issues and Ethics
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen:
JIC-TISETH.3V-11 Trends Issues and Ethics Trend Watching, Issue Management And Ethics 5 European Credits B (bachelor hoofdfase) Nee
TCK Bors (tel. 3422) (
[email protected]) Engels
Werkvorm
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Frequentie
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Diverse werkvormen
niet verplicht
2 maal per week
2520 minuten
1.11
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden? bij aanvangsblok 1: blok 1
Toetsen:
Toetsvorm
Resultaatschaal
Minimum cijfer
Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden?
Opdracht
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
33
2
bij aanvangsblok 1: 1. blok 1, week 36 2. blok 2, week 46
Schriftelijk tentamen
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
5,5
67
2
bij aanvangsblok 1: 1. blok 1, week 36 2. blok 2, week 46
178/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1
Korte beschrijving
The environment of an organization changes constantly and influences not only the communication of the organization, but also the organizational policies. One of the tasks of communication advisors, is to systematically detect, investigate, interpret and weigh relevant signals within the society in general or the environment of an organisation in particular. But what choices do you make in the selection of all the information surrounding the organization? How can you distinguish hypes from trends? How do you adjust your communication to new developments in society? And how does the organization influence the society? What kind of e thical implications does this have for your organisation, for you as an advisor and for your stake holders? These are the kind of questions we address during the subject ‘Trends, issues and ethics’. In this guide you find all the necessary information about the set up of the course and the assessments.
2.2
Learning outcomes
2.3
Kennisbasis
Trends: introduction/ trend pyramid Different forms of trends - Mega trends (social level) - Maxi trends (consumer level) - Micro trends (market/ product level) Developments of trends/ Trend factors influence trends in our society: - Economics - Technology - Demographic developments - Politics - Ecology - Culture and sociology
2.4 Geen
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
2.5 Geen kosten
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 42 Toetsduur (uren): 2 Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 44 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
179/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Understanding Audience
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen:
JIC-UNAUD.1V-13 Understanding Audience Understanding Audience 5 European Credits D (propedeuse) Nee
RCA Versmissen (tel. 3439) (
[email protected]) Engels
Werkvorm
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Frequentie
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Communication lecture
niet verplicht
1 maal per week
840 minuten
bij aanvangsblok 1: blok 1 bij aanvangsblok 2: blok 2
Consumer behaviour lecture
niet verplicht
1 maal per week
840 minuten
bij aanvangsblok 1: blok 1 bij aanvangsblok 2: blok 2
Consumer behaviour tutorial
niet verplicht
1 maal per week
420 minuten
bij aanvangsblok 1: blok 1 bij aanvangsblok 2: blok 2
Communication tutorial
niet verplicht
1 maal per week
420 minuten
bij aanvangsblok 1: blok 1 bij aanvangsblok 2: blok 2
1.11
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden?
Toetsen:
Toetsvorm
Resultaatschaal
Communication/Consumer Behaviour assignm
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 - 10,0
Communication/Consumer Behaviour exam
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 - 10,0
Minimum cijfer
5,5
5,5
Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
50
50
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden?
3
bij aanvangsblok 1: 1. blok 1, week 36 bij aanvangsblok 2: 1. blok 2, week 46 2. blok 3, week 6
3
bij aanvangsblok 1: 1. blok 1, week 36 bij aanvangsblok 2: 1. blok 2, week 46 2. blok 3, week 6
180/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1
Korte beschrijving
In Module Audience, we will help you to develop the following competencies from the ICM competences-list: Research, Design, Create. You will have the entire ICM study to develop these competences, in Module Audience you should make a first step. Consequently, these competences are operationalised as follows: Research · Conducts target group analysis, media use analysis Design · Presents pitch Create · Creates content for cross media
2.2
Learning outcomes
2.3
Kennisbasis
We all communicate. You communicate with your friends, family and teacher. The organisation you will work for communicates with clients and customers. We do this because we want to share knowledge, ideas and feelings. But in professional life most often we communicate because we want to achieve something. For instance, we want to change the other people’s attitudes and behaviours. We want to sell our products and services to them. But the members of the audience you are aiming at do not necessarily think the same, need the same, want the same. They may have different attitudes, opinions and convictions. Therefore, influencing an audience is much more complicated that it might look at first sight. Consequently, if you want your communication activities to be effective, you need to start with listening to your target group. What is their (cultural) background, what are the current attitudes and beliefs? Subsequently, you will have to adapt your approach to your target audience. You will have to tune the message. Also, you will have to adapt the way you deliver the message because different audiences use media in different ways. This course therefore offers you lectures and assignments to equip you with basic knowledge and understanding about communication and media in an international environment. It also tries to help you in developing an empathic attitude. In this course we focus on people – individuals, groups and audiences. We will look at their relation with media and culture. We will find out how people behave and how they interpret information. And last but not least, we will discover how we can influence this audience.
2.4 Geen
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
2.5 Geen kosten
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 42 Toetsduur (uren): 2 Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 44 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
181/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Titel
Understanding Intercultural Media
Opleidingsvariant
Werkvorm: Voltijd Toets: Voltijd
Collegejaar
2013-2014
1 Organisatorische gegevens 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
Cursuscode Cursusnaam Cursusnaam in Engels Aantal EC's Studiefase/niveau Cursus toegankelijk voor studenten van andere faculteiten? Excellentiemogelijkheden? Contactpersoon Voertaal Werkvormen:
JIC-UNDIM.2V-12 Understanding Intercultural Media Understanding Intercultural Media 5 European Credits B (bachelor hoofdfase) Nee
SE Hackett (
[email protected]) Engels
Werkvorm
Aanwezigheid verplicht?
Frequentie
Totale contacttijd cursus in minuten
Hoorcollege
niet verplicht
2 maal per week
1680 minuten
bij aanvangsblok 3: blok 3 bij aanvangsblok 4: blok 4
Werkcollege
niet verplicht
2 maal per week
840 minuten
bij aanvangsblok 3: blok 3 bij aanvangsblok 4: blok 4
1.11
In welke blokken wordt de werkvorm aangeboden?
Toetsen:
Toetsvorm
Resultaatschaal
Assignment
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
Exam
Tienpuntschaal 1,0 10,0
Minimum cijfer
5,5
5,5
Weging (afgerond op hele procenten)
40
60
Aantal keren dat een toets wordt aangeboden in een collegejaar
In welke blokken wordt de toets aangeboden?
3
bij aanvangsblok 3: 1. blok 3, week 6 bij aanvangsblok 4: 1. blok 4, week 16 2. blok 5, week 27
3
bij aanvangsblok 3: 1. blok 3, week 6 bij aanvangsblok 4: 1. blok 4, week 16 2. blok 5, week 27
182/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
2 Inhoudelijke gegevens 2.1 Korte beschrijving Have an understanding of geopolitical world changes and the role of world system Understand the key trends in the world of News Understand the use and value of content analysis as a research method and you will Be familiar of the trend of media globalisation in Asia Understand the role of the Internet in the changing media landscape Have a basic understanding of market related issues such as globalisation, glocalisation. Be able to apply research methodologies (at a basic level )such as content analysis, semiotics and discourse analysis to the media landscape to identify and analyse media trends 2.2 Learning outcomes 2.3
Kennisbasis
Media Trends and Issues Understanding Intercultural Media for second year students has been designed as a continuation of the first year media and research course, which offers an introduction and overview of the development of media, media use and research practices. In this course the students are offered an overview of some of the global communication theories, and stakeholders involved in global communication and are also introduced to emerging trends in the media and the intercultural communication landscape. Prominent themes include amongst others, the world of news which focuses on key global players such as CNN, BBC and Al Jazeera, the role and impact of global news agencies such as Reuters, media globalisation in Asia and Euromedia in Europe, the role of the Internet in global communication, the role and impact of leading advertising agencies such as WPP, Omnicom Group Inc., etc. In addition to an overview of the intercultural global media landscape students are introduced to research methodologies such as content analysis, semiotics, and narrative and rhetorical analysis. A brief introduction is given on how the information is collected and researched on a particular media issue/topic. International Media Law This course will help you to understand recent developments in the international media environment and how Law has caused or impacted on those developments. You will learn how culture, human rights and market forces impact on the media. You will see how the law restricts certain actions and why. You will be able to analyse recent legal developments from a multicultural and international perspective. As necessary, you wil be able to suggest changes to the law and back your opinion up with reasoned cogent argumentation. You will consider issues such as privacy versus freedom of expression; privacy versus data gathering for commercial purposes; copyright versus the desire to spread information freely and widely; defamation versus free speech; free speech versus limitations such as incitement to hatred or racism; protection of culture versus the free market approach; threats to the plurality of the media and possible solutions such as competition law or cultural quotas.
2.4 Geen
Ingangseisen Kosten en studiematerialen
2.5 Geen kosten
2.6 Workload Contactduur (uren): 42 Toetsduur (uren): 2 Zelfstudie (uren): Totaal (uren): 44 Het totaal aantal uren is berekend na optelling van de drie onderdelen in minuten. Door afrondingen kan de optelling van de onderdelen in uren iets afwijken van het totaal. 2.7 Opmerkingen 2.8
URL cursussite
183/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Appendices 11.1. Teaching and Examination Regulations FCJ 2013-2014 The Faculty OER has been incorporated in chapter 10 of the HU OER. A.
Articles 33 and 34 from the HU OER have been specified further for the faculty. Article 33
1.
By registering for a course, the student has automatically been registered for the first exam opportunity of that course. Taking part in the first exam opportunity is only possible by registering for a course in time. If a student has not registered for a course in time he or she will not be admitted to the exam of that course, nor is it possible to hand in assignments. For students registered for an exam, registration means using that exam opportunity. Students have to register separately for a resit (second exam opportunity). Registration is possible during teaching week 4 5 prior to the exam period.
2. 3. 4.
Article 34 1.
Exam opportunities
The study guide regulates if, and if so how, how often and when and for what (parts of) courses registration for exams can take place. At the Faculty of Communication and Journalism a student can register for no more than two exam opportunities for the same course in the same study year. If a student is registered for a course and exam (or resit), but does not take part in that exam (or resit), he or she will forfeit an exam opportunity in that study year. It is only possible to resit an exam if the exam taken has been assessed a fail. When participating in a resit all previous marks for the exam are cancelled. When a student fails a practical, he or she has to do the practical again. In that case a second opportunity within the same study year cannot be guaranteed.
2. 3. 4.
B.
Registration for exams
More specific faculty regulations
The Faculty of Communication and Journalism has the following more specific regulations, which form an integral part of the OER: 1. 2.
C.
Regulations Examination Boards HU Regulations Testing Committees FCJ
Faculty of Communication and Journalism courses
The Faculty of Communication and Journalism has the following courses and degree programmes: 1
B Communication Degree programme: Communication Management B Communication Systems Degree programmes: a) Digital Media and Communication b) Business Communication c) International Communication and Media B Journalism B Communication and Multimedia Design Degree programme: Communication and Media Design Associate Degree Event Manager (part of B Communication Management)
2
3 4 5
1.
Name course: Communication
184/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
1.1. The core data of this course: Name course: English name: Registration number: Location: Major(s):
Degree programme Variants: Degree: Abbreviation: Study load:
B Communicatie B Communication 34405 Utrecht Commercial Communication (60 ECs) Corporate and Internal Communication (60 ECs) Public Communication (60 ECs) International Commercial Communication (60 ECs) Communication Management Full-time, part-time and sandwich course (phasing out) Bachelor of Communication B Comn 240 ECs: first year: 60 ECs; main phase: 180 ECs: the latter made up of 150 ECs for the Major and 30 ECs for optional subjects
1.2. First year‟s (propaedeutic) exam The first year of the degree programme Communication has a so-called propaedeutic exam (art. 28). This propaedeutic exam is described in the study guide. 1.3. Educational entry requirements: 1.3.1. In addition to the general educational entry requirements as mentioned in article 11 of the registration regulations, the following educational entry requirements apply for the Communication programme: The GCSE subject clusters Nature and Technology, Nature and Health and Economics and Society allow direct entry to the programme; candidates with the Culture and Society cluster need to have passed Mathematics A or B as an additional requirement. 1.3.2. There are no specific requirements for practicing a profession or professions for which the Communication programme prepares. 1.4. Entry restrictions majors (art. 24): The Communication programme has the following majors after the propaedeutic phase: Commercial Communication Corporate and Internal Communication Public Communication There are no entry restrictions for these majors.
1.5. Binding Study Advice 1.5.1. 1.5.2. 1.5.3.
2.
For the Communication programme the standard for a binding study recommendation is 45 ECs. The binding recommendation is given not later than the end of the first year of registration. The Communication programme has no designated courses that have to be passed to meet the standard. A binding negative study recommendation implies that a student cannot continue the (full-time/part-time) Communication programme, nor that he or she can register for the AD Event Manager programme.
Name course: Communication Systems
2.1. The core data of this course: Name course: English name: Registration number: Location: Major(s): Degree programme (a) Degree programme (b) Degree programme (c)
B Communicatiesystemen B Communication Systems 34430 Utrecht not applicable Digital Media and Communication Business Communication International Communication and Media
185/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014 Variants: Degree: Abbreviation: Study load:
Full-time Bachelor of Communication B Comn 240 ECs: first year: 60 ECs; main phase 180 ECs: the latter made up of 150 ECs for the Major and 30 ECs for optional subjects
Degree programme (a): Digital Media and Communication 2.2
First year‟s (propaedeutic) exam The first year of the degree programme Digital Media and Communication has a socalled propaedeutic exam (art. 28). This propaedeutic exam is described in the study guide.
2.3
Educational entry requirements: 2.3.1 In addition to the general educational entry requirements as mentioned in article 11 of the registration regulations, the following educational entry requirements apply for the Digital Media and Communication programme: The GCSE subject clusters Nature and Technology, Nature and Health and Economics and Society allow direct entry to the programme; candidates with the Culture and Society cluster need to have passed Mathematics A or B as an additional requirement. 2.3.2 There are no specific requirements for practicing a profession or professions for which the Digital Communication programme prepares.
2.4
Binding Study Advice 2.4.1 For the Digital Media Communication programme the standard for a binding study recommendation is 45 ECs. The binding recommendation is given not later than the end of the first year of registration. 2.4.2 The Digital Media Communication programme has no designated courses that have to be passed to meet the standard. 2.4.3 A binding negative study recommendation implies that a student cannot continue the Digital Media and Communication programme, nor that he or she can register for the Business Communication and International Communication and Media degree programmes.
Degree programme (b): Business Communication 2.5
First year’s (propaedeutic) exam The first year of the degree programme Business Communication has a so-called propaedeutic exam (art. 28). This propaedeutic exam is described in the study guide.
2.6
Educational entry requirements: 2.6.1 In addition to the general educational entry requirements as mentioned in article 11 of the registration regulations, the following educational entry requirements apply for the Business Communication programme: The GCSE subject clusters Nature and Technology, Nature and Health and Economics and Society allow direct entry to the programme; candidates with the Culture and Society cluster need to have passed Mathematics A or B as an additional requirement. 2.6.2 There are no specific requirements for practicing a profession or professions for which the Business Communication programme prepares.
2.7
Binding Study Advice 2.7.1 For the Business Communication programme the standard for a binding study recommendation is 45 ECs. The binding recommendation is given not later than the end of the first year of registration. 2.7.2 The Business Communication programme has no designated courses that have to be passed to meet the standard. 2.7.3 A binding negative study recommendation implies that a student cannot continue the Business Communication programme, nor that he or she can register for the Digital Media and Communication and International Communication and Media degree programmes. 186/189
© Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
Degree programme (c): International Communication and Media (ICM)
3.
2.8
First year‟s (propaedeutic) exam The first year of the degree programme ICM has a so-called propaedeutic exam (art. 28). This propaedeutic exam is described in the study guide.
2.9
Educational entry requirements: 2.9.1 In addition to the general educational entry requirements as mentioned in article 11 of the registration regulations, the following educational entry requirements apply for the ICM programme: The GCSE subject clusters Nature and Technology, Nature and Health and Economics and Society allow direct entry to the programme; candidates with the Culture and Society cluster need to have passed Mathematics A or B as an additional requirement. 2.9.2 There are no specific requirements for practicing a profession or professions for which the ICM programme prepares.
2.10
Binding Study Advice 2.10.1 For the ICM programme the standard for a binding study recommendation is 45 ECs. The binding recommendation is given not later than the end of the first year of registration. 2.10.2 The ICM programme has no designated courses that have to be passed to meet the standard. 2.10.3 A binding negative study recommendation implies that a student cannot continue the ICM programme, nor that he or she can register for the Digital Media and Communication and Business Communication degree programmes.
Name course: Journalism
3.1. The core data of this course: Name course: English name: Registration number: Location: Major(s): Degree programme Variants: Degree: Abbreviation: Study load:
B Journalistiek B Journalism 34686 Utrecht not applicable Journalism Full-time Bachelor of Journalism B Jour 240 ECs: first year: 60 ECs; main phase: 180 ECs: the latter made up of 150 ECs for the Major and 30 ECs for optional subjects
3.2 First year‟s (propaedeutic) exam The first year of the degree programme Journalism has a so-called propaedeutic exam (art. 28). This propaedeutic exam is described in the study guide. 3.3 Educational entry requirements: 3.3.1 In addition to the general educational entry requirements as mentioned in article 11 of the registration regulations, the following educational entry requirements apply for the Journalism programme: The GCSE subject clusters Nature and Technology, Nature and Health, Economics and Society and Culture and Society all allow direct entry to the programme. 3.3.2 There are no specific requirements for practicing a profession or professions for which the Journalism programme prepares. 3.4 Binding Study Advice 3.4.1 For the Journalism programme the standard for a binding study recommendation is 45 ECs. The binding recommendation is given not later than the end of the first year of registration. 3.4.2 The Journalism programme has no designated courses that have to be passed to meet the standard. 3.4.3 A binding negative study recommendation implies that a student cannot continue the 187/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014 Journalism programme. 4.
Name course: Communication and Multimedia Design (CMD)
4.1. The core data of this course: Name course: English name: Registration number: Location: Major(s): Degree programme Variants: Degree: Abbreviation: Study load:
B Communication and Multimedia Design B Communication and Multimedia Design 34092 Utrecht not applicable Communication and Media Design Full-time Bachelor of Communication B Comn 240 ECs: first year: 60 ECs; main phase: 180 ECs: the latter made up of 150 ECs for the Major and 30 ECs for optional subjects
4.2 First year‟s (propaedeutic) exam The first year of the degree programme CMD has a so-called propaedeutic exam (art. 28). This propaedeutic exam is described in the study guide. 4.3 Educational entry requirements: 4.3.1 In addition to the general educational entry requirements as mentioned in article 11 of the registration regulations, the following educational entry requirements apply for the CMD programme: The GCSE subject clusters Nature and Technology, Nature and Health and Economics and Society allow direct entry to the programme; candidates with the Culture and Society cluster need to have passed Mathematics A or B as an additional requirement. 4.3.2 There are no specific requirements for practicing a profession or professions for which the CMD programme prepares. 4.4 Binding Study Advice 4.4.1 For the CMD programme the standard for a binding study recommendation is 45 ECs. The binding recommendation is given not later than the end of the first year of registration. 4.4.2 The CMD programme has no designated courses that have to be passed to meet the standard. 4.4.3 A binding negative study recommendation implies that a student cannot continue the CMD programme.
5.
Name course: Ad Event Manager
5.1. The core data of this course: Name course: English name: Registration number: Location: Major(s): Degree programme Variants: Degree: Abbreviation: Study load:
B Ad Event Manager B Ad Event Manager 80031 Utrecht not applicable Associate Degree Event Manager Full-time Associate Degree Communication AD Comn 120 ECs First year: 60 ECs; main phase: 60 ECs
5.2 First year’s (propaedeutic) exam The first year of the associate degree programme Ad Event Manager has a so-called propaedeutic exam (art. 28). This propaedeutic exam is described in the study guide. 5.3 Educational entry requirements: 5.3.1 In addition to the general educational entry requirements as mentioned in article 11 of the registration regulations, the following educational entry requirements apply for the Ad
188/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013
Studyguide for ICM programme 2013-2014
5.3.2
Event Manager programme: The GCSE subject clusters Nature and Technology, Nature and Health and Economics and Society allow direct entry to the programme; candidates with the Culture and Society cluster need to have passed Mathematics A or B as an additional requirement. There are no specific requirements for practicing a profession or professions for which the Ad Event Manager programme prepares.
5.4 Binding Study Advice 5.4.1 For the Ad Event Manager programme the standard for a binding study recommendation is 45 ECs. The binding recommendation is given not later than the end of the first year of registration. 5.4.2 The Ad Event Manager programme has no designated courses that have to be passed to meet the standard. 5.4.3 A binding negative study recommendation implies that a student cannot continue the Ad Event Manager programme, nor that he or she can register for the Communication Management degree programme.
189/189 © Hogeschool
Utrecht, september 2013